JP6891988B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In the gaming machine of the pachinko machine or the like, there is a gaming machine having a plurality of input spheres port, and a plurality of input spheres port to enter the sphere Sarezu flow down the game balls to be discharged from the gaming area out port (Patent Document 1 ).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-143268

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in the flow of the gaming ball in the gaming area.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the flow of a gaming ball.

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 includes a plurality of entrances, a guide unit configured to be able to guide the game ball toward at least one of the plurality of entrances, and the above-mentioned. A game machine including an out port for discharging a game ball that has flowed down without entering a predetermined entry port among a plurality of entry ports from the game area, and is one of the plurality of entry ports. The first entrance is arranged close to the lower edge of the game area or in contact with the lower edge of the game area to a position where the game ball cannot pass through the lower edge of the game area. The out port is provided with a first out port arranged on the right side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first ball entry port, and the width of the game area with respect to the first ball entry port. It is provided with a second out port arranged on the left side in the direction, and the guide portion has a plate-shaped flow bottom surface and is arranged at a position upstream of the first entry port. The flowing game ball can be guided toward the first entry port side, the first out port is arranged on the downstream side of the guide portion, and the guide portion simultaneously guides a plurality of game balls. The first ball entrance is arranged in a region on the left side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the center in the width direction of the game area, and the guide portion allows the right side in the width direction. A game ball that has flowed down is configured to be able to enter, and the game machine includes a branching means and an introduction means that constitutes an introduction path to the first entry port, and the branching means is the branching means. On the other hand, a game ball flowing down on the left side in the width direction of the game area can flow down toward the guide portion, and a game ball flowing down on the right side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the branching means is the plurality of entrances. It is configured so that it can flow down toward the second entrance of the ball, and the entrance to the introduction path is opened toward the guide portion side of the width direction side of the game area. Ru is configured.

The game machine according to claim 2 includes a liquid crystal display device, a game area in which a game ball can flow down at least on the right side of the liquid crystal display device, a plurality of entrances arranged in the game area, and the like. A guide unit configured to be able to guide a game ball toward at least one of a plurality of entry ports, and a game ball that has flowed down without entering a predetermined entry port among the plurality of entry openings. A game machine including an out port for discharging from the area, and the first ball entry port of the plurality of ball entry ports cannot pass the game ball between the game machine and the lower edge of the game area. The out port is arranged close to the lower edge of the game area or in contact with the lower edge of the game area up to the position to be, and the out port is on the right side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first ball entry port. The guide portion is provided with a first out port arranged in the above and a second out port arranged on the left side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first entry port, and the guide portion has a plate shape. It has a flow lower surface of the above, is arranged at a position upstream of the first entry port, and is capable of guiding the flowing game ball toward the first entry port side. The out port is arranged on the downstream side of the guide portion, the guide portion is configured to have a length capable of simultaneously guiding a plurality of game balls, and the first entry port is in the width direction of the game area. It is arranged in the area on the left side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the center, and the guide portion is configured to allow a game ball flowing down the right side in the width direction to enter the liquid crystal display device , and the game machine is branched. The branching means includes a means and an introduction means that constitutes an introduction path to the first entrance, and the branching means has a guide portion in which a game ball that flows down the left side of the game area in the width direction with respect to the branching means. The game ball that flows down to the right side of the game area in the width direction with respect to the branching means can flow down toward the second entrance of the plurality of entrances. consists, entrance to the introduction path, Ru is configured to be opened toward the guide portion side of the width direction side of the game area.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the flow of the gaming ball can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, the liquid crystal display device and the gaming ball can be visually recognized by the player.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front schematic diagram of a game board. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit which looked at the disassembled operation unit from the front. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a rotary operation unit. It is a rear view of a rotary operation unit. It is the disassembled front perspective view of the rotary operation unit which looked at the disassembled rotary operation unit from the front. It is the disassembled front perspective view of the rotary operation unit which looked at the disassembled rotary operation unit from the front. (A) is a front view of the case body, and (b) is a front view of the fixing member. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the support structure by the case body of the 1st gear, the 2nd gear and the 3rd gear. It is a front perspective view of the compound operation unit. It is the disassembled front perspective view of the composite operation unit which looked at the disassembled composite operation unit from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the composite operation unit in a state where a part of the composite operation unit is disassembled. It is a front perspective view of the opening / closing first gear, the opening / closing second gear, the rotating first gear, and the rotating second gear. It is a partially enlarged front view of the composite operation unit explaining the process of assembling the opening / closing 1st gear, the opening / closing 2nd gear, the rotating 1st gear, and the rotating 2nd gear to the 1st shaft and the 2nd shaft in chronological order. It is a partially enlarged front view of the composite operation unit explaining the process of assembling the opening / closing 1st gear, the opening / closing 2nd gear, the rotating 1st gear, and the rotating 2nd gear to the 1st shaft and the 2nd shaft in chronological order. It is an exploded front view of the composite operation unit for demonstrating the relative displacement state of the opening / closing 2nd gear and a slide rack member with respect to a back arm body. It is a front view of the composite operation unit which illustrated the opening / closing operation and the rotation operation of the operation member in time series. It is a front schematic diagram of the composite operation unit which schematically shows the meshing state of the opening / closing 1st gear and the opening / closing 2nd gear, and the meshing state of the rotating 1st gear and the rotating 2nd gear, respectively. It is a front schematic diagram of the composite operation unit which schematically shows the meshing state of the opening / closing 1st gear and the opening / closing 2nd gear, and the meshing state of the rotating 1st gear and the rotating 2nd gear, respectively. It is a front schematic diagram of the composite operation unit which schematically shows the meshing state of the opening / closing 1st gear and the opening / closing 2nd gear, and the meshing state of the rotating 1st gear and the rotating 2nd gear, respectively. It is a front view of the 1st coupling operation unit and the 2nd coupling operation unit in a state where the 1st engagement member and a pair of 2nd coupling members are arranged in the retracted position. It is a front view of the 1st coupling operation unit and the 2nd coupling operation unit in a state where the 1st engagement member and a pair of 2nd coupling members are arranged at the coupling position. (A) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit, and (b) is a bottom view of the first coupling operation unit in the direction of arrow XXXb of FIG. 33 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of the 1st coupling operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the 1st coupling operation unit. It is a rear view of a drive part. (A) is a front perspective view of the slide mechanism portion, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the slide mechanism portion. It is a front perspective view of the slide mechanism part which looked at the disassembled slide mechanism part from the front. It is a rear perspective view of the slide mechanism part which looked at the disassembled slide mechanism part from the back. (A) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit in a state where the first coupling member is arranged in the retracted position, and (b) is a first coupling in a state where the first coupling member is arranged in the retracted position. It is a rear view of the operation unit. (A) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit in a state where the first coupling member is arranged at the coupling position, and (b) is a first coupling in a state where the first coupling member is arranged at the coupling position. It is a rear view of the operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the 2nd coupling operation unit. (A) is a front view of the second coupling operation unit, and (b) is a rear view of the second coupling operation unit. It is a front view of the 2nd coupling operation unit. It is a model diagram which looked at the 1st coupling operation unit and the 2nd coupling operation unit in the state which the 1st coupling member and a pair of 2nd coupling members were arranged at the coupling position. It is a front perspective view of the ring operation unit in the state which the ring forming member is arranged in the retracted position. It is a front perspective view of the annulus operation unit in a state where an annulus forming member is arranged at a coupling position. It is an exploded front perspective view of the annulus operation unit which looked at the disassembled annulus operation unit from the front. It is the disassembled rear perspective view of the annulus operation unit which looked at the disassembled annulus operation unit from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the link member, (b) is a rear perspective view of the link member, and (c) is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the link member in the partial Lc of FIG. 50 (a). (D) is a side view of the link member in the direction of arrow Ld in FIG. 50 (a). It is a partially enlarged rear view of the annulus operation unit. It is a rear schematic diagram of the annulus operation unit which schematically illustrates the annulus operation unit in which a pair of annulus forming members are arranged in the retracted position. It is sectional drawing of the ring operation unit in line LIII-LIII of FIG. 52. It is a rear schematic diagram of the annulus operation unit which schematically illustrates the annulus operation unit which arranged the pair of annulus forming members at the position intermediate between the retracting position and the coupling position. FIG. 5 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the ring operation unit in the LV-LV line of FIG. 54. It is a rear schematic diagram of the annulus operation unit which schematically illustrates the annulus operation unit in which a pair of annulus forming members are arranged at the coupling position. FIG. 5 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the annular motion unit in the LVII-LVII line of FIG. 56. It is a front perspective view of the swinging operation unit in a state where an arm member is overhanging at an overhanging position. It is a front perspective view of the swing operation unit 800 in the state where the arm member 820 is retracted to the retracted position. It is a front perspective view of the swing operation unit in the state where the arm member is retracted to the retracted position. It is the disassembled front perspective view of the rocking operation unit which looked at the disassembled rocking operation unit from the front. (A) is a rear view of the swinging operation unit in a state where the arm member is arranged in the retracted position, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the swinging operation unit in the partial LXIb of FIG. 61 (a). is there. (A) is a rear view of the rocking operation unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the rocking operation unit in the partial LXIIb of FIG. 62 (a). (A) is a rear view of the rocking operation unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the rocking operation unit in the partial LXIIIb of FIG. 63 (a). (A) is a rear view of the rocking operation unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the rocking operation unit in the partial LXIVb of FIG. 64 (a).

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 35, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame with the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength (launch intensity) corresponding to the above, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and a general prize. It is configured by assembling a mouth 63, a first winning mouth 64, a second winning mouth 640, a first variable winning device 65, a second variable winning device 650, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like, and the peripheral portion thereof is inside. It is attached to the back surface side of the frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the game board 13 and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the plastic ball flows down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probabilistic jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the probability shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change state. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving medium) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than during normal times. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied at one time. The change may be made so that the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened is increased from the normal time. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and at one hit. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640a at one time are not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed so as to be higher than the normal one.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and synchronizes with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, while synchronizing with the variable display of the third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first of the third symbol display devices 81 is A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 can be reached during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the area below the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the balls flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through. It is configured in. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won to the second winning opening 640 may be configured to be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probability change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. ”Is easy to display, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 640 is likely to be won. Therefore, the ball is launched toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit by the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

A first variable winning device 65 is arranged on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular first specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. Further, a second variable winning device 650 is arranged on the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, and has a circular shape having a size substantially the same as that of the other winning openings 63, 64, 640 in the substantially central portion thereof. A second specific winning opening 650a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state shifts to a special game state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the special winning openings 65a and 650a, which are normally closed, are opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning openings 65a and 650a are closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the first specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (opening / closing solenoid) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. (Not shown). The first specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward on the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the first specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternately repeat the closed state and the closed state.

Specifically, the second variable winning device 650 is an opening which is a guide path for guiding the ball to the second specific winning opening 650a and an opening opposite to the second specific winning opening 650a side of the guide path. 651, a driving accessory 650b for opening and closing the opening 651, and a small opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the driving accessory 650b in the left-right direction around the lower side of the opening 651. And have. The second specific winning opening 650a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the small opening solenoid is driven to tilt the driving accessory 650b to the right to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the second specific winning opening 650a. It operates so as to alternate between the closed state and the closed state of time.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When a large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is provided in the game area and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are set for a predetermined time. During the opening of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is set for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning openings 65a and 650a. A gaming state that is released a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special gaming state. Further, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are not limited to one, and one or more or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or on the lower right side of the first winning opening 64. Not limited to the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like stuck on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71 and a second out port 72. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a are discharged through the first out opening 71 or the second out opening 72 (not shown). You will be guided to the road. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64, while the second out opening 72 is arranged on the left side of the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, the second out port 72 is arranged on the opposite side of the first out port 71 with the second specific winning opening 650a interposed therebetween.

Therefore, a ball that flows down the game area and reaches the lower end (inner rail 61 or outer edge member 73) of the game area on the right side (right side of FIG. 2) in front of the second specific winning opening 650a is an inner rail. It flows down along the inclination of 61 or the outer edge member 73 and is guided to the ball discharge path through the first out port 71, while the lower end of the game area (inner rail 61) on the left side of the front view from the second specific winning opening 650a. ) Is flown down along the inclination (curvature) of the inner rail 61, and is guided to the ball discharge path through the second out port 72.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 340, 430, 522, 640, 740, 830.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display fluctuation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power supply cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the layout (arrangement) of each configuration of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a, the out openings 71, 72, etc. in the game board 13 will be described. FIG. 5 is a schematic front view of the game board 13. In FIG. 5, each configuration of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a and the like is schematically shown, and a part of the game board 13 is partially enlarged and shown.

As shown in FIG. 5, in the front view of the game area, the portion of the inner rail 61 arranged on the lower right side (the portion on the right side of the first out port 71) is extended in a straight line and is the first. It is formed so as to be inclined upward in a direction away from the 1-out port 71.

A resin outer edge member 73 that defines the outer edge of the game area is disposed together with both rails 61 and 62 between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. Rail. The outer edge member 73 is formed by providing an arc-shaped wall surface extending the outer rail 62 on the inner surface side, and is continuously provided below the arc-shaped wall portion 73a in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 5). A vertical wall portion 73b formed by providing a wall surface extending linearly along the inner surface side, and a vertical wall portion 73b connected below the vertical wall portion 73b and extending linearly while inclining downward toward the inner rail 61. It is composed of an inclined wall portion 73c formed by providing a wall surface to be provided on the inner surface side.

As described above, in the game area defined by the inner rail 61, the outer rail 62, and the outer edge member 73, a part of a substantially circular shape (lower right part in FIG. 5) is formed in a substantially rectangular shape and expanded outward. It is said to be a shape. Specifically, the region defined by the linear portion of the inner rail 61 arranged on the right side of the first out port 71 and the inclined wall portion 73c and the vertical wall portion 73b of the outer edge member 73 has a substantially rectangular shape. Is formed in.

As a result, as compared with the case where the game area is formed in a substantially circular shape by extending the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, the game area as a whole is provided with a substantially rectangular area (lower right portion in FIG. 5). The area can be expanded. Therefore, the expanded area is used as a space for arranging the general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the through gate 67, and the like. Alternatively, it can be utilized as a space for forming a path for the ball to flow down, and the degree of freedom in arranging the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a, the flow path for the ball, and the like can be increased. As a result, the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 can be lowered downward (lower side in FIG. 5), so that the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased accordingly.

That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable winning device 65 are arranged in series along the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 5) below the third symbol display device 81. Was there. Therefore, the space required below the third symbol display device 81 increases in the vertical direction, which hinders the increase in size of the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, an enlarged portion of the game area (a substantially rectangular area, a lower right part in FIG. 5) is used as an arrangement space such as a winning opening or a flow path of a ball. It can be used as a space. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the second winning opening 640 and the first variable winning device 65 are arranged not directly under the first winning opening 64 but in the expanded portion of the game area described above. Therefore, since the position of the first winning opening 64 can be lowered by that amount, the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

Further, according to the gaming machine 13 of the present embodiment, the second specific winning opening 650a is not directly under the first winning opening 64, but on one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening 64 (variable winning device). The ball cannot pass between the position (that is, the second specific winning opening 650a) and the inner rail 61, which is offset to the opposite side of 65 (left side in FIG. 5) and abuts on the inner rail 61 (lower edge of the gaming area). It is placed at the position where Therefore, since the position of the first winning opening 64 can be lowered by that amount, the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

In this case, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, the first out port 71 and the second out port 72 are provided with routes for discharging the ball from the game area to the ball discharge path. 3 It is possible to further increase the size of the symbol display device 81.

That is, in order to increase the size of the third symbol display device 81, the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 is lowered, so that the position of the winning opening must be lowered accordingly. For example, when the position of the first winning opening 64 is lowered, the guide plate member 74 (a member that guides a ball at the time of right-handed hitting (a ball that has passed to the right of the variable display device unit 80) to the second specific winning opening 650a). ) Also needs to be lowered downward in order to secure a space for the ball to flow down between the first winning opening 64 and the first winning opening 64, and as a result, the position of the second specific winning opening 650a also needs to be lowered downward.

However, if the position of the second specific winning opening 650a is lowered too much, it becomes impossible to secure a space for the ball to flow down below the second specific winning opening 650a (between the inner rail 61). That is, the ball that has flowed down without being won in the winning opening cannot be discharged from the out opening arranged below the first winning opening 64. Therefore, there is a limit to lowering the position of the second specific winning opening 650a downward, which is a factor that makes it impossible to sufficiently increase the size of the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the first out opening 71, the second out opening 72 sandwiches the second specific winning opening 650a and the first out opening 71 (That is, the first out opening 71 and the second out opening 72 are arranged on the right side and the left side of the second specific winning opening 650a, respectively), so that the ball flows down the game area. The ball that reaches the lower end (inner rail 61 or outer edge member 73) of the game area on the right side (right side in FIG. 5) of the second specified winning opening 650a is inclined by the inner rail 61 or the outer edge member 73. The ball that has flowed down along the line and can be discharged to the ball discharge path through the first out port 71, while the ball that reaches the lower end (inner rail 61) of the game area on the left side of the front view from the second specific winning opening 650a is the inner rail 61. It can flow down along an inclination (curvature) and can be discharged from the second out port 72 to the ball discharge path.

In this way, by providing two routes (first out port 71 and second out port 72) for discharging the ball from the game area to the ball discharge path, the lower side (inner rail) of the second specific winning opening 650a is provided. It is not necessary to secure a space for the ball to flow down (between 61). Therefore, since the position of the second specific winning opening 650a can be further lowered (close to or connected to the inner rail 61), the position of the guide plate member 75 can be lowered by that amount, and by extension, the position of the guide plate member 75 can be lowered. Since the position of the first winning opening 64 can be lowered downward, the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be further increased accordingly.

In the present embodiment, the second winning opening 640 and the first specific winning opening 65a are offset to the right side of the board surface, and the second specific winning opening 650a is offset to the left side of the board surface and is close to the inner rail 61. By being arranged (or in contact with each other), the effect of the rotary operation unit 300 can be performed more effectively.

That is, when the player strikes right, only the right side of the board on which the ball flows down is noticed by the player, and in particular, for the ball that has not won the second winning opening 640, after that. The flow is rarely noticed by players. In this case, in the present embodiment, among the balls that have passed to the right of the variable display device unit 80, the balls that have passed from right to left on the upper side of the second winning opening 640 pass through the upper side of the guide plate member 74. It is flowed down toward the second specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, even if the second winning opening 640 is not won, the opportunity to win the second specific winning opening 650a then occurs, and from the expectation of winning the second specific winning opening 650a, the second The ball that has passed above the winning opening 640 from right to left can be made to pay attention to the player (look at it). As a result, the line of sight of the player can be directed to the center of the board surface below the variable display device unit 80. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the rotation operation unit 300 is arranged on the back side of the first winning opening 64, and the rotation operation unit 300 can be visually recognized through the game board 13 (through the game board 13). Therefore, when a ball that has not won a prize in the second winning opening 640 flows down toward the second specific winning opening 650a, the player is made to visually recognize the effect of the rotation operation unit 300, and the rotation operation is such. The effect of the unit 300 can be enhanced.

As described above, in the game board 13, the base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and the rotary operation unit 300 arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 is made visible to the player from the front side. Is possible. Here, the rotary operation unit 300 is a device that is operated on the occasion of winning a prize in the first winning opening 64 or the result of a lottery by winning, and is a device that is operated on the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60). 1 It is arranged at a position corresponding to the winning opening 64.

Therefore, for a player who visually follows a ball flowing down toward the first winning opening 64, in particular, when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64, a rotating motion is performed behind the first winning opening 64. Since the effect produced by the unit 300 can be visually recognized, the effect associated with the winning of the ball into the first winning opening 64 can be effectively performed. The detailed configuration of the rotary operation unit 300 will be described later.

In this case, the second winning opening 640 and the first variable winning device 65 are offset from the first winning opening 64 in the left-right direction (width direction of the game area, right direction in FIG. 5). , The positions of the first winning opening 64 and the rotary operation unit 300 can be lowered downward (lower side in FIG. 5), and as a result, the rotary operation unit 300 is positioned corresponding to the first winning opening 64 and is the game board 13. Even when it is arranged on the back side of the (base plate 60), the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

That is, when the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the first variable winning device 65 are arranged in series in the vertical direction as in the conventional pachinko machine, the position corresponding to the first winning opening 64 In the above, disposing the rotary operation unit 300 on the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60) causes the rotary operation unit 300 to interfere with the second winning opening 640 and the first variable winning device 65. The space required for arranging the winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the first variable winning device 65 increases in the vertical direction, which hinders the increase in size of the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, as described above, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, and the second variable winning device 650 are in the left-right direction with respect to the first winning opening 64. Since they are arranged offset in the (width direction of the game area), it is possible to avoid interference between the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650, and the rotary operation unit 300. By the minute, the position of the first winning opening 64 can be lowered downward, and the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

In particular, with respect to the first variable winning device 65, the offset amount can be sufficiently secured and the second variable can be secured by offsetting the first variable winning device 65 to the right side by using the area expanded in a substantially rectangular shape on the lower right side of the game area. The winning device 650 is provided with a second out port 72 in addition to the first out port 71, so that the position can be lowered downward without considering securing a space below for the ball to flow down. it can. As a result, a wider space for arranging the rotary operation unit 300 can be secured, so that it is possible to solve the contradictory problems of increasing the size of the third symbol display device 81 and increasing the size of the rotary operation unit 300. As a result, it is possible to enhance both the effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the effect of the rotation operation unit 300.

Here, the rotary operation unit 300 is formed in a substantially circular shape that can rotate around the first winning opening 64. As a result, the entire surrounding area surrounding the first winning opening 64 can be used as the production area. That is, the effect of the rotation operation unit 300 can be visually recognized by the player on the back side of the first winning opening 64. Therefore, when the production is started with the winning of the first winning opening 64 as an opportunity, the production is performed in the area centered on the first winning opening 64 in which the ball has entered, so that the first winning opening 64 It is possible to enhance the effect of the production that accompanies the winning of the prize.

Further, when the player starts to win a ball in the first winning opening 64 when the state of the rotating operation unit 300 (for example, the rotating position or the lighting state) becomes a predetermined state, the player starts. It is possible to insert the game ball toward the center of the object (rotational motion unit 300 in a predetermined state) that the player is visually recognizing, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect of the rotary motion unit 300. ..

Further, by forming the rotary operation unit 300 in a substantially circular shape in this way, the space around the rotary operation unit 300 can be effectively utilized, and the arrangement space for other winning openings and the like can be efficiently used. Can be secured. In particular, the arrangement space of the second variable winning device 650 can be efficiently secured. That is, since the first variable winning device 65 can be offset to the right with respect to the first winning opening 64 by using the area expanded in a substantially rectangular shape on the lower right side of the game area, the offset amount to the right side can be set. On the other hand, it is relatively easy to secure the second variable winning device 650, but it is difficult to secure a sufficient offset amount to the left side with respect to the first winning opening 64 because the inner rail 61 is curved in an arc shape. Become. In this case, since the rotary operation unit 300 has a substantially circular shape, a space for arranging the second variable winning device 650 on the lower left side of the rotary operation unit 300 is efficiently provided between the rotary operation unit 300 and the inner rail 61. Can be secured.

Further, since the rotary operation unit 300 is formed in a substantially circular shape centered on the first winning opening 64, the rotary operation unit 300 can be arranged substantially in the center in the width direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 5) of the game area. it can. That is, the center of the rotary operation unit 300 can be arranged on the virtual line that maximizes the distance between the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 and the inner rail 61 (distance in the vertical direction in FIG. 5). Therefore, the limited space of the game area can be effectively utilized while increasing the size of the third symbol display device 81, so that a wider space for arranging the rotation operation unit 300 can be secured and such rotation operation can be performed. The size of the unit 300 can also be increased efficiently.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the second winning opening 640 is not directly below the first winning opening 64, but is on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening 64 (the first variable winning device 65 side). , The right side of FIG. 5) is offset and arranged. In this case, the second winning opening 640 is arranged so that the opening 641 faces the other side in the width direction of the game area (the first variable winning device 65 side, the right side in FIG. 5). As a result, it is not necessary to provide a space for the ball to flow down to the second winning opening 640 above the second winning opening 640, and the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 is increased accordingly. Can be lowered downwards. As a result, the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the second specific winning opening 650a is not directly under the first winning opening 64, but on one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening 64 (first variable winning opening). It is offset and placed on the opposite side of the device 65 (on the left side of FIG. 5). In this case, the second specific winning opening 650a is arranged so that the opening 651 faces the other side in the width direction of the game area (the first variable winning device 65 side, the right side in FIG. 5). As a result, it is not necessary to provide a space for the ball to flow down to the second specific winning opening 650a above the second specific winning opening 650a, and the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 is correspondingly increased. The position of can be lowered. As a result, the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

That is, when the opening 641 of the second winning opening 640 and the opening 651 of the second specific winning opening 650a are arranged in a facing posture above the game area (upper side of FIG. 5), a space for flowing down the ball is provided. It is necessary to secure the opening 641,651 directly above, and it is necessary to raise the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 upward by that amount, which hinders the increase in size of the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, when the openings 641,651 face the other side in the width direction of the game area as in the present embodiment, a space for flowing down the ball is provided diagonally above the openings 641,651 (upper right side in FIG. 5). The position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 can be lowered by that amount. As a result, the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

In this way, when the openings 641,651 face the other side in the width direction of the game area, the electric accessory 640a, 650b is not directly above the second winning opening 640 and the second specific winning opening 650a, but is the second. It can be arranged on the side of the winning opening 640 and the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, it is not necessary to secure the arrangement space for the electric accessories 640a and 650b directly above the second winning opening 640 and the second specific winning opening 650a, and the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 is lowered by that amount. Can be lowered to. As a result, the size of the third symbol display device 81 can be further increased.

Further, since the openings 641,651 face the other side in the width direction of the game area, it is not necessary to provide a pair of electric accessories 640a and 650b for opening and closing the openings 641,651, and only one side is used. be able to. As a result, the capacity required for the driving means (for example, the solenoid) for driving the electric accessories 640a and 650b can be miniaturized, and the component cost can be reduced. At the same time, energy consumption can be suppressed.

Further, since the opening 641 faces the other side in the width direction of the game area, it is possible to prevent the difficulty level of winning the second winning opening 640 from being excessively lowered. That is, in the present embodiment, since the position of the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 is lowered downward, the arrangement space of the winning opening and the like is limited, and the arrangement position of the second winning opening 640 and the through gate 67 is arranged. The interval becomes narrower. Therefore, compared to a conventional pachinko machine in which the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the first variable winning device 65 are arranged in series in the vertical direction, it is more difficult to enter the ball into the second winning opening 640. It may be reduced and the playability may be impaired. Therefore, by forming the opening 641 so as to face the other side in the width direction of the game area, it is possible to prevent the ball from winning from directly above the second winning opening 640, and when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. It is possible to make it possible to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. As a result, it is possible to prevent the difficulty level of winning the second winning opening 640 from decreasing and improve the playability.

Further, even if the distance (dimension in the left-right direction in FIG. 5) from the opening 651 of the second specific winning opening 650a to the second specific winning opening 650a is increased by facing the other side in the width direction of the game area by the opening 651. It does not affect the distance between the third symbol display device 81 and the second specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, while increasing the size of the third symbol display device 81, a sensor device 652 for detecting the winning of a ball into the second specific winning opening 650a is arranged between the opening 651 and the second specific winning opening 650a. Can be done. As a result, the detection speed at which the ball has won the second specific winning opening 650a can be increased, so that the player's feeling of excitement associated with the winning can be enhanced.

In addition to this, it is possible to prevent over-winning in the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, when the second specific winning opening 650a is configured to be closed when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are won in the open second specific winning opening 650a, the tenth one. It is desirable that the driving accessory 650b is closed as soon as the ball wins a prize. However, when the sensor device 652 is arranged behind the base plate 60, the distance from the opening 651 to the sensor device 652 is increased.

Therefore, the period from when the tenth ball passes through the opening 651 to when it reaches the sensor device 652, that is, the period when the driving accessory 650b is in the open state becomes longer, and the eleventh and subsequent balls from the opening 651. A state in which a prize can be won in the second specific winning opening 650a is formed for a long period of time, and there is a risk that the fairness of the game will be lost.

On the other hand, according to the game board 13 of the present embodiment, as described above, the sensor device 652 that detects the winning of the ball into the second specific winning opening 650a is between the opening 651 and the second specific winning opening 650a. Since it is arranged in, the period until the sphere that has passed through the opening 651 is detected by the sensor device 652 can be shortened. As a result, it is difficult for the eleventh and subsequent balls to win a prize from the opening 651, and over-winning can be prevented.

Here, in the game board 13 of the present embodiment, the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a are arranged so as to be offset in the left-right (one side with the other side) direction of the game board 13, respectively. By doing so, the player is allowed to make a distinction between left and right, which contributes to the improvement of playability.

That is, in the game board 13 of the present embodiment, it is easier to win a prize by passing through the right side of the variable display device unit 80 to the first specific winning opening 65a, while it is easier to win a prize to the second specific winning opening 650a. It is easier to win a prize if you pass the left side of the unit 80. Which specific winning opening will be opened is determined by the stop symbol of the jackpot at that time, and the player will hit the left and right in order to aim at the specific winning opening on the side to be opened.

Which specific winning opening is opened can be set in units of the number of times (rounds) for each stop symbol of the jackpot, so only the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a may be opened each time. On the other hand, the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a may be opened alternately every number of times (rounds).

Therefore, it is necessary for the player to confirm which specific winning opening is open in units of the number of times (rounds), and to aim at the opening specific winning opening, it is necessary to strike the left and right sides. It has the effect of drawing attention not only to the other side but also to one side. That is, to prevent a situation in which the player pays attention only to one side or the other side of the game board 13, and to create a situation in which the rotary operation unit 300 arranged behind the first winning opening 64 is in sight. Therefore, the rotary operation unit 300 can be noticed, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored by making a decision to make a left / right strike for each number of jackpots (rounds), and by having the player make a left / right strike, the player can keep the same posture. It is possible to alleviate the feeling of fatigue caused by playing a game.

Next, the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 13. First, the accommodation structure of each unit 300 to 800 in the rear case 210 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 9.

FIG. 6 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIGS. 7 to 9 are an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200 when the disassembled operation unit 200 is viewed from the front. Note that FIG. 8 shows a state in which the swing operation unit 800, the ring operation unit 700, and the first coupling operation unit 500 are mounted on the rear case 210, and in FIG. 9, in addition to the mounting state shown in FIG. Further, a state in which the second coupling operation unit 600 and the combined operation unit 400 are mounted on the rear case 210 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 6 to 9, one side (front side of the paper in FIG. 7) of the operation unit 200 is opened from the bottom wall portion 211 and the outer wall portion 212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 211. A back case 210 formed in a box shape is provided. The back case 210 is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame in front view by forming a rectangular opening 211a in the center of the bottom wall portion 211. The opening 211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be arranged).

In the operation unit 200, a rotary operation unit 300, a combined operation unit 400, a first coupling operation unit 500, a second coupling operation unit 600, an annular operation unit 700, and a swing operation unit 800 are respectively arranged in the internal space of the rear case 210. It is housed and is configured as one unit.

Specifically, the first coupling operation unit 500 is located above the opening 211a, the annular operation unit 700 is located below the opening 211a, and the swinging operation unit 800 is located on the left and right sides of the opening 211a. , Each of which is arranged on the bottom wall portion 211 of the back case 210 (see FIG. 8).

In contrast to the state shown in FIG. 8, the second coupling operation unit 600 is arranged on the front side of the ring operation unit 700, and the composite operation unit 500 is arranged on the front side of the swing operation unit 800 in a laminated state. And housed in the back case 210 (see FIG. 9). With respect to the state shown in FIG. 9, the rotary operation unit 300 is arranged in a laminated state in which it is overlapped on the front side of the second coupling operation unit 600, and is housed in the back case 210 (see FIG. 6).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the other operating units (for example, the rotary operating unit 300) are arranged in a laminated state in which the other operating units (for example, the rotating operating unit 300) are superposed on the front side with respect to the predetermined operating unit (for example, the second coupling operating unit 600). Therefore, in front view, at least a part of a predetermined operation unit (for example, front case body 612 of the second coupling operation unit 600, see FIG. 42) can be shielded by another operation unit.

In other words, when the game board 13 is formed of a light-transmitting material and the operation unit arranged on the back side of the game board 13 is visible to the player, only the necessary part of the predetermined operation unit is visible. Can be made visible to the player, and other parts can be shielded from the player by another operation unit. As a result, it is not necessary to design the predetermined effect member that is shielded by the other operation unit on the assumption that the entire member is visually recognized by the player, so that the degree of freedom in the design can be improved. ..

Next, the outline of the operation mode of each unit 300 to 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 13. In the description of FIGS. 10 to 13, FIGS. 6 to 9 will be referred to as appropriate.

10 to 13 are front views of the operating unit 200. It should be noted that FIG. 10 shows a state in which the ring forming member 790 of the ring operation unit 700 is arranged at the coupling position, and FIG. 11 shows a state in which the arm member 820 of the swing operation unit 800 is arranged at the overhang position. In No. 12, the first engaging member 539 of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling member 630 of the second coupling operation unit 600 are arranged at the coupling positions. The state in which the 492 is arranged at the overhanging position is illustrated.

The annulus operation unit 700 includes a pair of annulus forming members 790, and these pair of annulus forming members 790 are operated (displaced) between the retracted position shown in FIG. 8 and the coupling position shown in FIG. At the retracted position shown in FIG. 8, the pair of ring-forming members 790 are retracted to the back side of the rotary operation unit 300 while being distributed to the left and right, and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 6). On the other hand, at the coupling position shown in FIG. 10, the pair of ring-forming members 790 are arranged at the center of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81) and are coupled to each other (pair). The ring shape is formed by the ring-forming member 790).

The swing operation unit 800 includes a pair of arm members 820 formed so as to swing (rotate), and the pair of arm members 820 are placed between the retracted position shown in FIG. 8 and the overhang position shown in FIG. Operate (displace) with. At the retracted position shown in FIG. 8, the pair of arm members 820 are retracted to the back side of the composite operation unit 400 and are invisible to the player (see FIG. 6). On the other hand, at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 11, the pair of arm members 820 have their tips overhanging in the opening 211a of the back case 210 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81).

The first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 include a first engaging member 539 and a pair of second coupling members 630, respectively, and the first engaging member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are shown in FIG. It is operated (displaced) between the retracted position shown in 9 and the coupling position shown in FIG. At the retracted position shown in FIG. 9, the first engaging member 539 is retracted to the back side of the composite operating unit 400, and the second coupling member 630 is retracted to the back side of the composite operating unit 400, which is visible to the player. It is considered impossible (see FIG. 6). On the other hand, at the coupling position shown in FIG. 12, the first engaging member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged at the center of the opening 211a of the back case 210 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81). Combined with each other.

The composite operation unit 400 includes four members (moving members 491, 492) formed so as to be swingable (rotatable), and these four members (moving members 491, 492) are placed in the retracted positions shown in FIG. It is operated (displaced) between the above position and the overhanging position shown in FIG. At the retracted position shown in FIG. 9, the four members (operating members 491 and 492) are retracted to the side of the opening 211a (that is, the third symbol display device 81) of the rear case 210, and each pair of two members is retracted to the side. They are arranged in a linearly aligned posture along the vertical direction. On the other hand, at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 13, the tips of the four members (moving members 491 and 492) are caused to overhang in the opening 211a of the rear case 210 (that is, in front of the third symbol display device 81). , Are arranged in a posture extending linearly from the center of the opening 211a.

The rotation operation unit 300 includes a rotation member 330 formed rotatably, and rotates the rotation member 330. As shown in FIGS. 10 to 13, the rotary member 330 of the rotary motion unit 300 is rotationally operated at a fixed position, and the motion members 491 and 492 of the composite motion unit 400 are in the overhang position or the retracted position. Since it is arranged in the foreground at any position, it is always visible to the player via the game board 13 (see FIG. 2).

Each of these operation units 300 to 800 is formed so as to be able to operate independently, and is arranged in a stacked state as described above. Therefore, among the operation units 300 to 800, each of these operation units 300 to 800 is arranged. Those arranged in different layers can be operated at the same time. That is, as illustrated in FIGS. 10 to 13, each of the operation units 300 to 800 can be operated independently, and these operations can be combined, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The rotary operation unit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19. FIG. 14 is a front perspective view of the rotary operation unit 300, and FIG. 15 is a rear view of the rotary operation unit 300.

As described above, the rotary operation unit 300 is arranged at a position (overlapping position in the front view) corresponding to the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2 or 5) on the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60). It is an effect member to be installed, and the receiving entrance 361 is opened in the center of the front, and the ball won in the first winning opening 64 is received from the receiving entrance 361 and guided to the ball discharge path (not shown) through the guide passage 380. To do.

A rotating member 330 having an annular shape in front view and a decorative member 370 which is a decorative resin member are arranged on the front side of the rotating operation unit 300, and a receiving port 361 is located at a substantially central portion of the rotating member 330. (Fixing member 360) is arranged. The rotating member 330 is rotatably formed from a light-transmitting resin material, and the lighting and blinking of the LED arranged on the back side thereof is transmitted to the front side, and the rotating member 330 is rotated by itself to win the first prize. A predetermined effect is performed around the mouth 64 (see FIG. 2 or 5).

16 and 17 are an exploded front perspective view of the rotational operation unit 300, which is a front view of the disassembled rotary operation unit 300. Note that FIG. 16 shows a state in which only the rotating member 330 is disassembled. Further, in FIG. 17, the decorative member 370 is not shown, and a part of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 is partially cross-sectionally viewed.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the rotary operation unit 300 has a case body 310 forming a skeleton on the rearmost side thereof, an illumination base 320 fixed to the case body 310, and a front surface of the illumination base 320. A rotating member 330 arranged on the side, a plurality of gears (first gear 351 and second gear 352 and third gear 353) for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 340 to the rotating member 330, and them. A fixing member 360 for fixing the first gear 351 of the plurality of gears to the case body 310 and a decorative member 370 arranged around the case body 310 are mainly provided.

The case body 310 has an illumination base attachment portion 311 formed in a substantially annular shape in front view corresponding to the illumination base 320, and a gear attachment portion formed so as to be retracted to the rear side of the illumination base attachment portion 311. The 312 is mainly provided with the illumination base mounting portion 311 and the mounting pedestal 313 extending outward from the outer edge of the gear mounting portion 312, respectively, and these are integrally formed from the resin material.

An illumination base 320 is fastened to the front side and a decorative member 370 is fastened to the outer peripheral side of the illumination base attachment portion 311 by fastening screws. The gear mounting portion 312 is formed by connecting three recesses having a substantially circular shape in front view, which are recessed corresponding to the outer shapes of the first gear 351 to the third gear 353, and the first gear 351 is formed in each recess. The third gear 353 is housed (arranged), respectively.

An opening 311a is formed on the inner peripheral side of the illumination base mounting portion 311 above the portion of the gear mounting portion 312 in which the first gear 351 is housed. By forming the opening 311a in the case body 310, the rotating member 330 (fastened portion 333) is connected to the first gear 351 (fastening seat portion 351d) by the fastening screw from the back surface side of the case body 310 through the opening 311a. Can be fastened and fixed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being exposed on the front side of the rotating member 330 and improve its appearance.

The gear mounting portion 312 is formed with a passage port 314, a fastened portion 315, an insertion portion 316, and a guide convex portion 317, respectively, in a recess in which the first gear 351 is housed. The passage port 314 is a passage that communicates with the receiving port 361 of the fixing member 360, and guides the ball that has flowed in from the receiving port 361 of the fixing member 360 to the guide passage 380 formed on the back side of the case body 310.

The guide passage 380 is formed as a passage through which a ball can pass between the mounted member and the back surface of the case body 310 by mounting a member having a U-shaped cross section on the back surface of the case body 310. (See FIG. 15). The guide passage 380 communicates with the passage port 314 on the back surface of the case body 310 and extends downward.

An insertion hole is formed in the mounting pedestal 313, and the rotary operation unit 300 is second-coupled by fastening the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole to the front case body 612 of the second coupling operation unit 600. It is fastened and fixed to the rear case 210 via the operating unit 600 (see FIGS. 9 and 42).

The fastened portion 315 is a portion (recessed portion in which a female screw is engraved on the inner circumference) for fastening and fixing the fixing member 360 to the gear mounting portion 312, and is left and right across the passage port 314. A pair is formed at asymmetric positions (see FIG. 18). The insertion portion 315 is for inserting a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the gear mounting portion 312 (case body 310) to the front case body 612 (see FIGS. 9 and 42) of the second coupling operation unit 600 on the back side. It is a through hole and is formed above the passage port 314.

The guide convex portion 317 is a rail-shaped portion for guiding the rotation of the first gear 351 and is projected from the front of the gear mounting portion 312 as a convex portion in an annular shape in the front view. A front view annular guide recess 351e corresponding to the guide portion 317 is recessed on the back surface of the first gear 351 (see FIG. 19), and the guide protrusion 317 is fitted into the guide recess 351e. , The rotation position of the first gear 351 with respect to the gear mounting portion 312 is defined.

Here, the gear mounting portion 312 is arranged at a position (eccentric position) where the passage port 314 is deviated downward from the center in the front view circular region formed by being surrounded by the guide convex portion 317. , The fastened portion 315 is arranged on the left and right sides of the passing port 314, and the insertion portion 316 is arranged above the passing port 314. As a result, as will be described later, the rigidity of the case body 310 and the fixing member 360 can be ensured while efficiently securing the space for fastening and fixing in the limited space.

In the gear mounting portion 312, a shaft portion 318 is projected from a recess in which the second gear 352 is housed. The shaft portion 318 is a shaft body for supporting the second gear 352, and is inserted into a shaft hole 352a formed in the center of the second gear 352. In the present embodiment, it is possible to omit providing a retainer for the second gear 352 at the tip of the shaft portion 318 inserted into the shaft hole 352a of the second gear 352. Details will be described later.

A drive motor 340 is arranged on the back surface of the gear mounting portion 312 at a position corresponding to a recess in which the third gear 353 is housed. The drive motor 340 is arranged with its drive shaft 340a protruding from the front surface of the gear mounting portion 312 (inside the recess in which the third gear 353 is housed), and the third gear 353 is fixed to the drive shaft 340a. To.

The illumination base 320 is formed in an annular shape in front view, and has a substrate portion 321 on which a plurality of LEDs 321a are mounted on the front side, and is arranged in front of the substrate portion 321 and has a plurality of front surfaces of the substrate portion 321. It is configured to include a partition portion 322 for partitioning into an area.

Specifically, the partition portion 322 is provided with a predetermined interval between the inner edge ribs 322a and the outer edge ribs 322b extending along the inner and outer edges of the substrate portion 321 and the ribs 322a and 322b. An annular intermediate rib 322c formed concentrically and a plurality of radial ribs 322d extending radially outward from the center of each of the ribs 322a to 322c intersect in a grid pattern. Is arranged. The plurality of radial ribs 322d are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (approximately 30 degree intervals in the present embodiment).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the illumination base 320 is divided into a total of 24 regions, 12 on the inner peripheral side and 12 on the outer peripheral side, by the partition portion 322, and each of the partitioned regions is divided into each. One or two LEDs 321a are arranged. As a result, when each LED 321a is individually lit or blinked, the difference in brightness between the area related to the lighting or blinking and the area not related to the lighting or blinking can be increased, and as a result, the effect of effect is enhanced. be able to.

The rotating member 330 includes a front view annular rotating body 331 having an opening formed in the center, and a cylindrical outer wall portion 332 extending in the axial direction from the outer edge of the rotating body 331, and these are light-transmitting. It is integrally formed from a sex resin material. The inner diameter of the opening formed in the center of the rotating body 331 corresponds to the outer diameter of the fixing member 360, and in the assembled state, the fixing member 360 is housed in the opening of the rotating body 331 (see FIG. 14).

On the back surface of the rotating main body 331, the fastened portions 333 are formed at a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment). The fastened portion 333 is a portion (recessed portion in which a female screw is engraved on the inner circumference) at which a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the rotating main body 331 (rotating member 330) to the first gear 351 is fastened, and is a rotating main body. They are arranged at positions that are the same distance from the center of 331 and at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction.

On the front surface of the rotating main body 331, a plurality of annular protrusions 331a to 331e formed in a front view annular shape and arranged concentrically with each other, and radiating outward in the radial direction from the center of the annular protrusions 331a to 331e. A plurality of radial protrusions 331f extending linearly are provided. The plurality of radial protrusions 331f are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (approximately 30 degree intervals in the present embodiment). That is, in the present embodiment, the circumferential spacing of the radial protrusions 331f coincides with the circumferential spacing of the radial ribs 322d of the illumination base 320.

The rotating main body 331 is formed to have a uniform wall thickness (thickness dimension) as a whole, and in the portion where the annular protrusions 331a to 331e or the radiation protrusion 331f are projected, the wall thickness (thickness dimension) is increased by the amount of the protrusion. The thickness dimension) is made thicker (larger). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for light to pass through the portions where the protrusions 331a to 331f are projected.

In this case, in the assembled state of the rotary operation unit 300, the outer edge rib 322b of the partition member 322 is located at the position corresponding to the annular protrusion 331e located on the outermost side in the radial direction (the position overlapping in the front view), and the annular protrusion 331d. The intermediate rib 322c of the partition member 322 is arranged at a position corresponding to the annular protrusion 331d and the annular protrusion 331c (the position where they overlap in the front view), which is located on the outer side in the radial direction. ..

As described above, in the rotating member 330, the region corresponding to each region partitioned by the partition member 322 of the illumination base 320 is partitioned by the protrusions 331a to 331f, so that each LED 321a of the illumination base 320 When each of the lights and blinks is individually lit and blinked, the difference in brightness between the area related to the lighting and blinking and the area not related to the lighting and blinking can be increased, and as a result, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

As described above, in the rotating member 330, the section of such a region is achieved by projecting the annular protrusions 331a to 331e and the radiation protrusions 331f from the front and increasing the thickness dimension. As a result, for example, it is not necessary to print or dispose a separate member on the front surface of the rotating member 330, and the entire rotating member 330 can be formed in a single color, thus reducing the product cost. Not only can it be done, but the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The inner diameter of the outer wall portion 332 of the rotating member 330 is set to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the partition member 322 (outer edge rib 322b) of the illumination base 320. The structure is such that the partition member 322 of the illumination base 320 is internally fitted on the peripheral side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light of the LED 321a from leaking from the outer peripheral side of the partition member 322, and to efficiently irradiate the front side with the light. Further, when the rotating member 330 is fastened and fixed to the first gear 351, the partition member 322 is internally fitted to the outer wall portion 332. It can be rotated relative to each other. That is, each of the fastened portions 333 of the rotating member 330 can be aligned with each fastening seat portion 351d (insertion hole) of the first gear 351 by simply rotating both relative to each other, and the radial position can be adjusted. Since there is no need to do so, workability can be improved accordingly.

The first gear 351 has a front view annular first main body 351a having an opening in the center through which a fixing member 360 can be inserted, and teeth engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the first main body 351a. The first flange portion 351c protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the first main body 351a in a flange shape at a position on the front side (rotating member 330 side) of the first gear 351 with respect to the 351b and its teeth 351b, and the third flange portion thereof. A plurality of fastening seats 351d (three in this embodiment) protruding from the outer peripheral surface of the first main body 351a at a position closer to the front side (rotating member 330 side) of the first gear 351 than the 351c, and the first main body 351a. A guide recess 351e (see FIG. 19), which is recessed on the back side of the gear and into which the guide protrusion 317 of the gear mounting portion 312 is inserted, is provided, and the fixing member 360 is fastened and fixed to the gear mounting portion 312. It is rotatably held between the fixing member 360 and the gear mounting portion 312.

Since the first gear 351 is formed by projecting the first flange portion 351c from the outer peripheral surface of the first main body 351a, the rigidity of the first gear 351 can be increased by the first flange portion 351c. In particular, in the present embodiment, since the first flange portion 351c is continuously provided on the axial end surface of the tooth 351b, the rigidity of the tooth 351b can be increased. As a result, it is possible to improve the transmission efficiency and improve the durability of the teeth 351b and 352b by making the meshing state with the second gear 352 appropriate. Further, since the first flange portion 351c also serves as a retaining member for the second gear 352 as described later, it is possible to reduce the component cost by omitting the retaining component.

The fastening seat portion 351d is a portion to be fastened and fixed to the fastened portion 333 of the rotating main body 331 (rotating member 330), and is arranged at a position corresponding to each fastened portion 333 of the rotating main body 331. That is, each fastening seat portion 351d is provided with an insertion hole for inserting a fastening screw to be fastened to the fastened portion 333, and the insertion hole is the same distance from the center of the first gear 351. It is a position and is arranged at positions that are unequally spaced in the circumferential direction. Therefore, the first gear 351 and the rotating member 330 can be fastened and fixed only at one phase position. Therefore, when assembling the rotating member 330 to the first gear 351, the operator makes a mistake in the circumferential position. It is possible to avoid assembling.

In order to enable fastening and fixing of the first gear 351 and the rotating member 330 only at a phase position of 1, the insertion holes of the fastening seats 351 are necessarily provided at positions that are the same distance from the center of the first gear 351. It does not have to be arranged. The insertion holes of the fastening seat portions 351 may be arranged at positions at equal intervals in the circumferential direction and at different distances from the center of the rotating main body 331.

However, as in the present embodiment, it is preferable to dispose the insertion holes of the fastening seats 351 at positions at the same distance from the center of the first gear 351. That is, since the length dimension (overhang length) of each fastening seat portion 351d can be made the same, when the first gear 351 is injection-molded from a resin material, its moldability can be improved. is there.

Here, in order to fasten and fix the fastening screw from the back side of the case body 310 to the fastened portion 333 of the rotating member 330 via the insertion hole of the fastening seat portion 351d, it is necessary to form an opening 311a in the case body 310. There is. In this case, when the insertion holes of the fastening members 351 are arranged at different distances from the center of the first gear 351, the movement loci of the insertion holes are different, and the opening width of the opening 311a is increased accordingly. Therefore, since it is necessary to reduce the rigidity, according to the present embodiment, the movement locus of each insertion hole can be made the same, so that the opening width of the opening 311a can be minimized accordingly.

The second gear 352 has a second main body 352a having a circular shape in front view, teeth 352b engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the second main body 352a, and a shaft hole 352c formed in the center of the second main body 352a. By inserting the shaft portion 318 of the gear mounting portion 312 into the shaft hole 352c, the shaft portion 318 is rotatably held by the gear mounting portion 312 in a state of being meshed with the first gear 351.

The third gear 353 has a third main body 353a having a circular shape in front view, teeth 353b engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the third main body 353a, and the front side (rotating member 330) of the third gear 353 with respect to the teeth 353b. A third flange portion 353c that projects from the outer peripheral surface of the third main body 353a in a flange shape at a position (side) is provided, and the drive shaft 340a of the drive motor 370 is fixed to the third main body 353a. It is held by the drive shaft 340a of the drive motor 340 in a state of being meshed with the two gears 352.

Therefore, when the drive motor 340 is rotationally driven and the third gear 353 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the second gear 352, the second gear 352 is rotated, and the rotation of the second gear 352 is the second. It is transmitted to the 1st gear 351 and the 1st gear 351 is rotated. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 340 is transmitted to the rotating member 330 which is fastened and fixed to the first gear 351 via the fastening seat portion 351d and the fastened portion 333, and the rotating member 330 is rotated.

As in the case of the first gear 351, the third gear 353 is formed so that the third flange portion 353c projects from the outer peripheral surface of the third main body 353a. Therefore, the third flange portion 353c causes the third gear 353. The rigidity of the can be increased. In particular, in the present embodiment, since the third flange portion 353c is continuously provided on the axial end surface of the tooth 353b, the rigidity of the tooth 353b can be increased. As a result, it is possible to improve the transmission efficiency and improve the durability of the teeth 353b and 352b by making the meshing state with the second gear 352 appropriate. Further, since the third flange portion 353c also serves as a retaining member for the second gear 352, as will be described later, it is possible to reduce the component cost by omitting the retaining component.

The fixing member 360 is a columnar member for fixing the first gear 351 to the gear mounting portion 312, and includes a receiving port 361 and an insertion portion 362. The reception port 361 is a passage that communicates with the first winning opening 64 when mounted on the game board 13, and guides the ball that has flowed in from the first winning opening 64 to the passing port 314 of the gear mounting portion 312. The insertion portion 362 is a through hole for inserting a fastening screw for fastening or inserting the fixing member 360 into the fastened portion 315 or the insertion portion 316 of the gear mounting portion 312.

FIG. 18A is a front view of the case body 310, and FIG. 18B is a front view of the fixing member 360. Note that FIG. 18A shows a state in which the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 and the third gear 353 are arranged on the case body 310, and one of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353. The part is partially cross-sectionald.

As shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B, the passage port 314 formed in the gear mounting portion 312 of the case body 310 is downward from the center of the first gear 351 as described above (FIG. 18 (FIG. 18). a) Positionally displaced (eccentric) to the lower side). Therefore, in the annular region formed around the passage port 314, the gear mounting portion 312 has an upper width dimension (FIG. 18 (a) vertical dimension) of the passage port 314 as compared with a lower width dimension. Be widened.

Similarly, for the fixing member 360 that is inserted into the inner peripheral side of the first gear 351 and fastened and fixed to the gear mounting portion 312, the receiving port 361 formed in the fixing member 360 is downward from the center of the fixing member 360 ( It is dislocated (eccentric) to the lower side of FIG. 18 (b). Therefore, in the annular region formed around the receiving port 361, the fixing member 360 has a wider width dimension above the receiving port 361 (vertical dimension in FIG. 18B) than a lower width dimension. Will be done.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the passage port 314 and the reception port 361 are misaligned (eccentric), and a wide (increased width dimension) portion is formed in a part of the periphery (annular region) thereof. Since the insertion portions 316 and 362 are arranged (drilled) in the widened portion, a large-diameter hole can be bored by effectively utilizing the limited space, and even in such a case, the case body 310 And the rigidity of the fixing member 360 can be ensured.

That is, the insertion portions 316 and 362 are formed as holes through which fastening screws for fastening and fixing the rotary operation unit 300 to the front case body 612 (see FIG. 9 or FIG. 42) of the second coupling operation unit 600 can be inserted. Since it is a part and the weight to support it is large, a large-diameter fastening screw is inserted, so it is necessary to form a hole with a relatively large diameter. By forming the (enlarged) portion, it is possible to efficiently secure a space for drilling a large-diameter hole by utilizing such a portion. On the other hand, even when such a large-diameter hole is drilled, the hole is drilled in a partially widened region, so that the rigidity can be ensured.

FIG. 19 is a schematic view schematically showing a support structure of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 and the third gear 353 by the case body 310, and corresponds to the arrow XIX direction view of FIG. In FIG. 19, the case body 310 is cross-sectionally viewed, and a part of the first gear 351 and the second gear 352 is partially cross-sectionald.

As shown in FIG. 19, the first gear 351 is rotatably supported by the gear mounting portion 312 by fitting the guide convex portion 317 of the gear mounting portion 312 into the guide recess 351e recessed on the back side. To. Further, the first gear 351 is restricted from falling off from the gear mounting portion 312 in the axial direction (upper side of FIG. 19) by the fixing member 360 fastened and fixed to the gear mounting portion 312. On the other hand, the third gear 353 is fixed to the drive shaft 340a of the drive motor 340. Examples of the fixing method include a press-fitting method and an adhesive method.

The second gear 352 has teeth 352b of the first gear 351 and the teeth 351b of the third gear 353 by inserting the shaft portion 318 of the gear mounting portion 312 into the shaft hole 352c formed in the second main body 352a. , 353b are rotatably supported by the gear mounting portion 312 in a state of being meshed with the gear mounting portion 312.

In this case, as described above, the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 have the first flange portion 351c and the third flange protruding outward in the radial direction from the outer peripheral surfaces of the first main body 351a and the third main body 353a. Each portion 353c is formed, and the first flange portion 351c and the third flange portion 353c project to a position where they overlap with the axial end surface of the second gear 352. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the second gear 352 from coming out from the shaft portion 318 of the gear mounting portion 312 in the axial direction (upper side in FIG. 19). As a result, it is not necessary to dispose the retaining component at the tip of the shaft portion 318, so that the number of components can be reduced and the component cost can be suppressed accordingly. Further, at the time of assembly, for the second gear 352, it is only necessary to insert the shaft portion 318 of the gear mounting portion 312 into the shaft hole 352c, and the step of mounting the retaining part can be omitted, so that the manufacturing cost is reduced accordingly. It can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, the first flange portion 351c of the first gear 351 and the third flange portion 353c of the third gear 353 come into contact with the second gear 352 at two different points, so that the second gear 352 is in the axial direction. Not only can it be surely restricted from coming out of the gear, but it is also possible to prevent the second gear 352 from rotating while tilting with respect to the shaft portion 318. As a result, it is possible to improve the transmission efficiency and the durability by making the meshing state of the teeth 352b of the second gear 352 and the teeth 351b and 353b of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 appropriate. In particular, since the two positions that come into contact with the second gear 352 are set at positions that are out of phase by about 180 degrees, the above-mentioned effect can be exhibited more remarkably. The phases of the two locations are preferably set within the range of about 160 degrees to about 180 degrees.

Here, it is sufficient that the first flange portion 351c and the third flange portion 353c of the first gear 351 and the third gear 353 project to the mountaintop side from the valleys of the teeth 351b and the teeth 353b. This is because if the teeth 351b and the teeth 353 are overhanging from the valleys, the second gear 352 can come into contact with the end face of the tooth 352b on the mountaintop side. Further, it is possible to suppress the material required for forming the first flange portion 351c and the third flange portion 353c, thereby reducing the weight and the material cost. However, it is preferable that the first flange portion 351c and the third flange portion 353c project outward in the radial direction from the mountaintop side of the teeth 351b and the teeth 353. This is because the inclination of the second gear 352 can be suppressed more reliably.

Next, the combined operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 30.

As described above, the composite operation unit 400 includes four members (moving members 491 and 492) (see FIGS. 7 and 13), and operates (displaces) each of these members (moving members 491 and 492). Consists of four units for. That is, the composite operation unit 400 is two units arranged in a vertical direction on the left side of the opening 211a and two units arranged in a vertical direction on the right side of the opening 211a in the front view of the rear case 210. It consists of two units. In this case, the structure (technical idea) for operating (displacement) each member (moving member 491, 492) is the same in each of the four units. Therefore, in the following, one unit out of these four units will be used. (A unit arranged on the upper right side of the opening 211a, see FIGS. 7 and 13) will be referred to as a combined operation unit 400.

FIG. 20 is a front perspective view of the combined operation unit 400. As shown in FIG. 20, in the composite operation unit 400, operating members 491 and 492 are arranged on the front side of the mounting base 410, and the operating members 491 and 492 are made to perform opening / closing operation and rotation operation in a complex manner (FIG. 20). See 27). That is, the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged to face each other in a posture in which their longitudinal directions are parallel to each other, and the operation of expanding / contracting the facing interval (opening / closing operation) and the base side arranged on the mounting base 410 are An operation that rotates as a center (rotational operation) is formed in a feasible manner. A decorative member 411 formed as a decorative body is arranged on the front surface of the mounting base 410.

In the present embodiment, two types of operation modes (opening / closing operation and rotation operation) of the operating members 491 and 492 are formed so as to be able to be executed by one drive motor 430. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide the drive motor 430 for the two types of operation modes, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly. The detailed configuration of such a structure will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 23.

FIG. 21 is an exploded front perspective view of the combined operation unit 400 with the disassembled combined operation unit 400 viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the composite operation unit 400 in a state where a part of the composite operation unit 400 is disassembled, and the configuration shown on the left side of FIG. 22 is viewed in front and is shown on the right side of FIG. 22. The configuration is viewed from the back. It should be noted that in FIGS. 21 and 22, the decorative member 411 is not shown, and in FIG. 22, the mounting base 410 is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the combined operation unit 400 includes a mounting base 410 disposed on the rear case 210 (see FIG. 7), a holding case 420 mounted on the mounting base 410, and a holding case 420 thereof. A plurality of gears rotatably supported by the shaft, a drive motor 430 that generates a driving force for rotationally driving the plurality of gears, and a back arm whose base end is rotatably supported by the holding case 420. A slide rack member 481, a first pinion leg member 482, and a second pinion leg member 483 narrowed between the body 471 and the front arm body 472 and the facing surfaces of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, and their first. It mainly includes one pinion leg member 482 and operating members 491 and 492 connected to the tip of the second pinion leg member 483.

The holding case 420 includes a back case body 421 that is attached to the mounting base 410, and a front case body 422 that is arranged to face the front side of the back case body 421. A plurality of gears are rotatably supported and housed in an internal space formed between the facing surfaces.

In the holding case 420, a drive motor 430 is arranged on the back side of the back case body 421, and three rotation shafts (deceleration shaft 425, ath reduction shaft 425, ath) are provided between the back case body 421 and the front case body 422. The 1st shaft 426 and the 2nd shaft 427) are erected in a posture parallel to the drive shaft of the drive motor 430, respectively, and a plurality of gears are rotatably supported from the reduction shaft 425 to the 2nd shaft 427. A pinion gear 431 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 430.

The plurality of gears are a reduction gear 441 pivotally supported by the reduction shaft 425, an opening / closing first gear 451 pivotally supported by the first shaft 426, a rotating first gear 461, and opening / closing pivotally supported by the second shaft 427. It consists of a second gear 452 and a rotating second gear 462 (see FIGS. 24 and 25). The reduction gear 441 includes a large-diameter gear 441a and a small-diameter gear 441b coaxially formed integrally with the large-diameter gear 441a, and transmits the rotation of the pinion gear 431 to the opening / closing first gear 451 while decelerating the rotation. .. Here, with reference to FIG. 23, the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452, the rotary first gear 461, and the rotary second gear 462 will be described.

FIG. 23 is a front perspective view of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452, the rotary first gear 461, and the rotary second gear 462. The opening / closing first gear 451 is engraved on the outer circumference of the main body 451a, the insertion hole 451b which is formed through the main body 451a through which the first shaft 426 is inserted, and the insertion hole 451b. The teeth 451c to be provided, a pair of connecting protrusions 451d protruding from the axial end surface (front surface) of the main body 451a and located across the insertion hole 451b, and a pair of connecting protrusions 451d formed through the main body 451a to the side of the insertion hole 451b. It is provided with a positioning hole 451e to be located.

The rotary first gear 461 is a gear that is arranged on the front side of the opening / closing first gear 451 and is pivotally supported on the first shaft 426 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) together with the opening / closing first gear 451. An insertion hole 461b that is formed through the main body portion 461a through which the first shaft 426 is inserted, a tooth 461c that is engraved on a part of the outer circumference of the main body portion 461a centering on the insertion hole 461b, and a main body portion 451a. It is provided with a pair of connecting holes 461d which are formed through the insertion holes 461b and located so as to sandwich the insertion holes 461b, and a detected portion 461e which is formed so as to project outward in the radial direction from the outer periphery of the main body portion 451a and is detected by an optical sensor.
The main body portion 461a of the rotating first gear 461 has a cylindrical surface (hereinafter, a cylindrical surface) whose outer peripheral surface is a region excluding the formation region of the teeth 461c (that is, the teeth 461c are not formed) about the axis of the insertion hole 461b. It is formed as a "cylindrical surface 461a1"). The outer diameter of the cylindrical surface 461a1 (distance from the axis of the insertion hole 461b) is smaller than the outer diameter of the tooth tip circle of the tooth 461c and larger than the outer diameter of the tooth bottom circle of the tooth 461c. As a result, as will be described later, it is possible to improve the rigidity of the main body portion 461a of the rotary first gear 461 and the rigidity of the non-formed surface 462a1 formed portion of the rotary second gear 462 at the same time.

Further, a pair of connecting protrusions 451d of the opening / closing first gear 451 are formed in the pair of connecting holes 461d of the rotating first gear 461 so as to be internally fitted, and the internal fitting allows the rotation to rotate with respect to the opening / closing first gear 451. The rotation position (phase) of the first gear 461 can be positioned, and both can be connected and integrally rotated in the same phase.

The opening / closing second gear 452 is engraved in a part of the outer periphery of the main body portion 452a, the insertion hole 452b which is formed through the main body portion 452a and through which the second shaft 427 is inserted, and the insertion hole 452b. It includes a tooth 452c to be provided, a connecting protrusion 452d protruding from the axial end surface (front surface) of the main body portion 452a, and a positioning hole 452e formed through the main body portion 452a.

The opening / closing second gear 452 is arranged with the back arm body 471 sandwiched between the back arm body 421 (that is, on the front side of the back arm body 471), and the shaft support of the back arm body 471. The insertion hole 452b is rotatably supported in a cylindrical portion erected along the hole 471a (see FIGS. 21 and 22). Further, the connecting protrusion 452d of the opening / closing second gear 452 is connected to the connecting groove 481c of the slide rack member 481, and the rotation of the opening / closing second gear 452 is transmitted to the slide rack member 481 through this connection (FIG. 26).

The rotary second gear 462 is engraved in a part of the outer periphery of the main body 462a centering on the main body 462a, the insertion hole 462b which is formed through the main body 462a and the second shaft 427 is inserted through the main body 462a, and the insertion hole 462b. A tooth 462c to be provided, a pair of connecting protrusions 462d protruding from the axial end surface (front surface) of the main body 462a and having a hole formed through the inside, and a positioning hole 462e formed through the main body 452a. To be equipped with.

The main body portion 462a of the rotary second gear 462 is connected to both sides of the teeth 462c, and the outer peripheral surface (hereinafter referred to as “non-formed surface 462a1”) of the region where the teeth are not formed is on the insertion hole 462b side. It is formed as a curved surface that dents toward (that is, has a center of curvature outward in the radial direction). Specifically, the curvature of the non-formed surface 462a1 is set to the same curvature as the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 or a slightly smaller curvature (that is, a slightly larger radius).

Further, the rotary second gear 462 is arranged on the front side (a posture in which the opening / closing second gear 452 is overlapped in the axial direction) of the opening / closing second gear 452, but is in a state independent of the opening / closing second gear 452 (that is, in a different phase). It is pivotally supported by the second shaft 427 (relatively rotatable state). Further, the rotary second gear 462 is fastened to the connecting protrusion 472e (see FIG. 22) of the front arm body 472 by fastening the fastening screw inserted into the hole of the connecting protrusion 462d, so that the connecting protrusions 462d and 472e are connected to each other. They are connected to each other. Therefore, the rotating second gear 462 and the front arm body 472 (and the back arm body 471) can be integrally rotated in the same phase through such a connection.

In this way, since the connecting protrusion 472e (see FIG. 22) of the front arm body 472 is fastened and fixed to the connecting protrusion 462d of the rotating second gear 462, both are fastened via the connecting protrusions 462d and 472e. The rotary second gear 462 and the front arm body 472 can be formed as an integral structure by connecting at a plurality of locations (two locations in the present embodiment). As a result, the rigidity of the rotary second gear 462 can be increased by utilizing the rigidity of the front arm body 472.

Here, as will be described later, the rotary second gear 462 receives a reaction force from the rotary first gear 461 when the non-formed surface 462a1 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotary first gear 461 (FIG. 28 to 30), it is necessary to secure the rigidity to withstand the reaction force. In this case, for example, if the rotary second gear 462 is thickened, the weight increases, and if a highly rigid material is used, the material cost increases.

On the other hand, according to the rotary second gear 462 of the present embodiment, the rigidity of the front arm body 472 can be utilized (that is, by being integrated with the front arm body 472) to increase the rigidity. It is not necessary to increase the wall thickness of the rotating second gear 462 or to use a highly rigid material. As a result, it is possible to improve the durability of the rotary second gear 462 while reducing the weight and cost of the rotary second gear 462.

In particular, the rotary second gear 462 has a position where the connecting protrusion 462d faces the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotary first gear 461 across the non-formed surface 462a1 in the back surface side of the non-formed surface 462a1 (that is, in the assembled state). Since it is arranged in FIGS. 28 to 30), as will be described later, when the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461, the rotating first gear is formed. The rigidity of the portion that receives the reaction force from the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the 461 can be effectively increased by using the rigidity of the front case body 472 or the like or the metal fastening screw. As a result, it is possible to further achieve both weight reduction and cost reduction of the rotary second gear 462 and improvement of their durability.

Further, the gear ratio (gear ratio) of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 is the same as the gear ratio (gear ratio) of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452. Therefore, as will be described later, when the rotating first gear 461 is rotated by a unit rotation angle, the rotation angle at which the rotating second gear 462 is rotated is the same as the unit rotation angle, and the opening / closing first gear 451 rotates. It coincides with the rotation angle at which the second rotary gear 462 is rotated.

A description will be given by returning to FIGS. 21 and 22. In the assembled state, the pinion gear 431 of the drive motor 430 is meshed with the large-diameter gear 441a of the reduction gear 441, and the small-diameter gear 441b of the reduction gear 441 is meshed with the opening / closing first gear 451. The opening / closing second gear 452 is meshed with the opening / closing second gear 451 and the rotating second gear 462 is meshed with the rotating first gear 461 (see FIGS. 24 and 25). Therefore, when the drive motor 430 is rotationally driven, the rotation is transmitted to the opening / closing first gear 451 via the pinion gear 431 and the reduction gear 441, and the opening / closing first gear 451 is rotated.

In this case, as described above, since the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are connected by the inner fitting of the connecting protrusion 451d into the connecting hole 461d, they can rotate integrally in the same phase. Will be done. That is, when the opening / closing first gear 451 is rotated, the rotation first gear 461 is also rotated, the rotation of the opening / closing first gear 451 is transferred to the opening / closing second gear 452, and the rotation of the rotating first gear 461 is rotated. It is transmitted to the second gear 462, respectively.

In the present embodiment, the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are independent of each other and can rotate relative to each other in different phases (see FIGS. 28 to 30). Therefore, while the rotational driving force of the drive motor 430 integrally rotates the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461, the rotational driving force is transmitted to the opening / closing second gear 452, and the rotational first gear 452 is rotated. A state in which the rotational driving force is cut off can be formed on the two gears 462. That is, it is possible to form a state in which the rotational operation of the operating members 491 and 492 is stopped and the opening / closing operation is executed. The details of such a structure and operation will be described later.

Positioning holes 421a and 421b are formed through the back case body 421 on the sides of the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427, respectively. Further, the positioning holes 410a and 410b are formed through the mounting base 410 corresponding to the positioning holes 421a and 421b. That is, when the back case body 421 is fastened and fixed to the mounting base 410, the positioning hole 410a is arranged at a position where the positioning hole 410a communicates with the positioning hole 421a, and the positioning hole 410b is arranged at a position where the positioning hole 410b communicates with the positioning hole 421b.

In the present embodiment, by inserting a columnar jig into the positioning holes 421a and 421b and the positioning holes 451e, 452e and 462e of the gears 451 and 452 and 462, respectively, the gears 451 and 452 with respect to the back case body 421 are inserted. , 461, 462 mounting position (phase), and the phase (rotation position) between the rotary first gear 461 and the open / close first gear 451 and the rotary second gear 462 and the open / close second gear 452. it can. The positioning method will be described later.

The back arm body 471 is a member for transmitting the rotation of the rotating second gear 462 to the operating members 491 and 492 together with the front arm body 472 to rotate the operating members 491 and 492 (see FIG. 26). A shaft support hole 471a through which the second shaft 427 is inserted, a plurality of insertion holes 471b through which fastening screws (not shown) are inserted (four in this embodiment), a first pinion leg member 482 and a second pinion. A plurality of (four in this embodiment) shaft portions 471c that rotatably support each of the leg members 483 and a concave groove having a U-shaped cross section extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the back arm body 471. The guide groove 471d and the positioning hole 471e formed through the shaft support hole 471a are provided.

A collar 427a arranged in the back case body 421 is inserted into the shaft support hole 471a so that the back arm body 471 can rotate about the second shaft 427 with respect to the back case body 421. To. Further, the cylindrical portion forming the shaft support hole 471a by the inner peripheral surface is inserted into the insertion hole 452b of the second opening / closing gear 452, and the second opening / closing gear 452 can be rotated by the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion. It is supported by.

The positioning hole 471e is formed through the positioning hole 462 of the rotary second gear 462 and the positioning hole 452e of the opening / closing second gear 452, respectively. That is, as will be described later, when the front arm body 472 is coupled (fastened and fixed) to the back arm body 471 and the rotary second gear 462 is coupled (fastened and fixed) to the front arm body 472, the back arm body 471 The phases of the positioning hole 471e and the positioning hole 462e of the rotary second gear 462 (rotational positions centered on the second shaft 427) are matched. On the other hand, in the opening / closing second gear 452, the insertion hole 452b is rotatably supported by the cylindrical portion of the back arm body 471, and the opening / closing second gear 452 is centered on the shaft support portion. When it is rotated relative to 471 and placed at a predetermined rotation position, the positioning hole 452e of the opening / closing second gear 452 is relative to the positioning hole 471e of the back arm body 471 and the positioning hole 462e of the rotary second gear 462. , The phases (rotational positions around the second axis 427) are matched.

The front arm body 472 can be fastened to the tip by a shaft support hole 472a through which the second shaft 427 is inserted and a fastening screw that protrudes toward the back arm body 471 and is inserted into the insertion hole 471b of the back arm body 471. A plurality of raised fastening portions 472b (4 in this embodiment) formed in the above, a plurality of receiving recesses 472c (4 in this embodiment) which are recesses capable of receiving the tips of the shaft portions 471c, and a U-shaped cross section. A guide concave groove 472d extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the front arm body 472 as a concave groove, and a guide concave groove 472d arranged with a shaft support hole 472a interposed therebetween and connected to a connecting protrusion 462d of the rotary second gear 462 ( It is provided with a connecting protrusion 472e to be fastened and fixed).

A collar 422a arranged in the front case body 422 is inserted into the shaft support hole 472a so that the front arm body 472 can rotate about the second shaft 427 with respect to the front case body 422. To. That is, since the front arm body 472 is connected to the rotary second gear 462 via the connecting protrusions 462d and 472e, the rotary second gear 462 receives a rotational drive force from the rotary first gear 461 and is second. When rotated around the shaft 427, the front arm body 472 (and the back arm body 471 connected to the front arm body 472) is also rotated around the second shaft 427 together with the rotating second gear 462.

In the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 471b of the back arm body 471 is fastened to the raised fastening portion 472 of the front arm body 472, whereby the front surface of the back arm body 471 and the front arm are fastened. It is connected to the back surface of the body 472 in a posture facing each other. In this case, a gap (space) corresponding to the protruding height of the raised fastening portion 472b is formed between the two facing surfaces (front surface and back surface). Therefore, the slide rack member 481, the first pinion leg member 482, and the second pinion leg member 483 can be displaceably arranged by utilizing this gap.

The slide rack member 481 transmits the rotation of the opening / closing second gear 452 to the operating members 491 and 492 together with the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 to open and close the operating members 491 and 492. It is a member (see FIGS. 26 and 27), and is formed on a long main body portion 481a, a rack portion 481b formed as rack gears on both left and right sides of the main body portion 481a, and one end in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 481a. It is provided with a connecting groove 481c and a guide convex portion 481d projecting from the front surface and the back surface of the main body portion 481 in a substantially rectangular cross section and extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 481a.

As described above, the connecting groove 481c of the slide rack member 481 is a groove through which the connecting protrusion 452d of the opening / closing second gear 452 is inserted, and the connecting protrusion 452d has a slidable groove width and the main body portion 481. It extends linearly along the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of. Further, in the assembled state of the slide rack member 481, the guide convex portion 481d is inserted into the guide concave grooves 471d and 472d of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472. Therefore, the direction in which the slide rack member 481 can slide with respect to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 is the extending direction of the guide concave grooves 471d and 472d (that is, the longitudinal length of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472). (Direction) is regulated (see FIG. 26).

The first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 have shaft support holes 482b and 483b formed through the main body portions 482a and 483a and one end of the main body portions 482a and 483a in the longitudinal direction, and the shaft support holes 482b. , 483b are formed as pinion gears centered on the gear portions 482c and 483c, and connecting holes 482d and 483d formed through the other ends of the main body portions 482a and 483a in the longitudinal direction. The gear portions 482c and 483c are arranged on the left and right sides of the 481 in a state of being meshed with the rack portion 481b of the slide rack member 481.

The shaft support holes 482b and 483b are holes through which the shaft portion 471c of the back arm body 471 is inserted and pivotally supported in the assembled state, whereby the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 are formed. It is rotatable with respect to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 around the shaft support holes 482b and 483b (shaft portion 471c). Therefore, by sliding the slide rack member 481 with respect to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg members 482 and the second pinion leg members 482 and 2 The pinion leg member 483 can be rotated.

A plurality of operating members 491 and 492 are formed in a columnar shape from the back surface side thereof so as to be inserted into the connecting holes 482d and 483d of the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 (four in the present embodiment). ), The raised fastening portions 491a and 492a are provided. The protruding tips of the raised fastening portions 491a and 492a are formed so that the fastening screws can be fastened. Therefore, the protruding tips of the raised fastening portions 491a and 492a are inserted into the connecting holes 482d and 483d, and the fastening screws are fastened to the protruding tips from the side opposite to the insertion direction to form the first pinion leg members 482 and the second. The operating members 491 and 492 are connected to the pinion leg member 483.

The raised fastening portions 491a and 492a are formed with rib-shaped portions protruding from the outer peripheral surface excluding the protruding tip, and the end faces of the rib-shaped portions are the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion. It comes into contact with the front surface of the leg member 483. As a result, the operating members 491 and 492 can be arranged at positions raised from the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 by the protruding height of the raised fastening portions 491a and 492a. Therefore, even in a structure in which the front arm body 472 is arranged between the slide rack member 481, the first pinion leg member 482, the second pinion leg member 483, and the operating members 491 and 492, the front arm body 472 interferes with the slide rack member 481. It is possible to open and close the operating members 491 and 492 without doing so.

An urging spring 484 made of a coil spring is arranged between the pair of first pinion leg members 482 in a state of being elastically stretched and deformed, and the elastic recovery force of the urging spring 484 is applied to the pair. The first pinion leg member 482 is configured to act in a direction close to each other. As a result, when the operating members 491 and 492 are closed in the opening / closing operation, the urging force of the urging spring 484 is used to bring the operating members 491 and 492 into close contact with each other to form a gap. Can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25, a method for positioning the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452, the rotary first gear 461, and the rotary second gear 462 will be described. In the description of such a positioning method, FIGS. 21 to 23 will be referred to as appropriate.

24 and 25 show a process of assembling the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 to the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427 in chronological order. It is a partially enlarged front view of the composite operation unit 400. In FIG. 24 (a), the reduction gear 441 is assembled to the reduction gear 425, and in FIG. 24 (b), the first shaft 426 is further opened / closed with respect to the state shown in FIG. 24 (a). In FIG. 25 (a), the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotary second gear 462 are further assembled to the second shaft 427 with respect to the state shown in FIG. 24 (b) when the first gear 451 is assembled. In FIG. 25 (b), a state in which the rotating first gear 461 is further assembled to the first shaft 426 is shown with respect to the state shown in FIG. 25 (a).

Here, as described above, the combined operation unit 400 sequentially transmits the rotational driving force of the drive motor 430 to the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452 via the reduction gear 441, whereby the opening / closing second gear is second. The slide rack member 481 is displaced by the rotation of the gear 452 to open and close the operating members 491 and 492, and the rotational driving force of the drive motor 430 is applied to the rotary first gear 461 and the rotary second gear 462 via the reduction gear 441. The back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 are rotated by the rotation of the rotating second gear 462, and the operating members 491 and 492 are rotated.

Therefore, in order to properly perform the opening / closing operation and the rotation operation of the operating members 491 and 492 (that is, avoiding interference between the members and deviation of the moving range), the opening / closing second gear 452 with respect to the opening / closing first gear 451 The rotation position (phase, meshing position) of the second gear 461 and the rotation position of the second rotation gear 462 with respect to the first rotation gear 461 are positioned at predetermined rotation positions, and the respective gears 451 to 462 are held in the holding case. It needs to be assembled to each 420.

However, in a conventional gaming machine, in order to assemble these two gears after positioning the rotation position (phase, meshing position) of the other gear with respect to one gear in this way, the operator rotates both gears. Since it was necessary to visually adjust the position and assemble, the work was complicated, and not only the work efficiency was poor, but also there was a risk of assembly failure.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the relative rotation positions (phase, meshing position) of the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 with respect to the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461, respectively. A positioning structure for positioning the mounting position (phase) of the gears 451, 452, 461, 462 with respect to the back case body 421 is provided, and by using this positioning structure, when each gear 451-462 is assembled to the holding case 420, It is configured so that it is possible to avoid the occurrence of assembly defects while improving the workability.

Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 24A, the reduction gear 441 is assembled to the reduction shaft 425 and meshed with the pinion gear 431. As described above, since the positioning holes 421a and 421b of the back case body 421 are communicated with the positioning holes 410a and 410b (see FIG. 21) of the mounting base 410, respectively, the positioning holes 410a are communicated from the back side of the mounting base 410. A jig (not shown) is inserted into each of the parts and 410b, and the jig is projected from the positioning holes 421a and 421b toward the front side of the back case body 421. The jig is formed as a columnar body having a circular cross section having an outer diameter equal to or slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the positioning hole 410a or the like.

Next, the opening / closing first gear 451 is assembled (shaft-supported) to the first shaft 426 while the jig protruding from the positioning hole 421a of the back case body 421 is inserted into the positioning hole 451e of the opening / closing first gear 451. As a result, as shown in FIG. 24B, the opening / closing first gear 451 can be meshed with the reduction gear 441, and the mounting position (phase) of the opening / closing first gear 451 with respect to the back case body 421 can be positioned. ..

While maintaining the state of being positioned with respect to the back case body 421 (the state in which the jig is inserted into the positioning hole 451e of the opening / closing first gear 451), the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotary second gear 462 are then placed. Assemble to 2 shafts 427 (support the shafts).

The opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotary second gear 462 are operated in a state of being integrated with the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472. That is, in the opening / closing second gear 452, the insertion hole 452 is pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion of the back arm body 471, and in the rotating second gear 462, the connecting protrusion 462d is the connecting protrusion 472e of the front arm body 472. The opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are interposed between the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 in a state of being fastened and fixed to. Further, the jig inserted into the positioning hole 421b of the back case 421 is projected from the surface of the back case 421 to a height position where it can be inserted into the positioning hole 462e of the rotary second gear 462.

In this case, when assembling the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotary second gear 462 to the second shaft 427, the jig protruding from the positioning hole 421b of the back case body 421 is used to open / close the positioning hole 471e of the back arm body 471. The opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotary second gear 462 are assembled (shaft-supported) to the second shaft 427 while being sequentially inserted into the positioning hole 452e of the two gears 452 and the positioning hole 462e of the rotary second gear 462. As a result, as shown in FIG. 25A, the opening / closing second gear 452 is meshed with the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation position (phase, meshing position) of the opening / closing second gear 452 with respect to the opening / closing first gear 451. Can be positioned, and the mounting position (phase) of the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 with respect to the back case body 421 can be positioned.

While maintaining the state of being positioned with respect to the back case body 421 (at least the state in which the gear is inserted into the positioning hole 471e of the back arm body 471), finally, the opening / closing position supported by the first shaft 426 is the opening / closing position. While inserting the connecting protrusion 451d of the 1st gear 451 into the connecting hole 461d of the rotating 1st gear 461, the rotating 1st gear 461 is assembled (shaft-supported) to the 1st shaft 426. As a result, as shown in FIG. 25B, the rotary first gear 461 is meshed with the rotary second gear 462, and the mounting position (phase) of the rotary second gear 462 with respect to the back case body 421 is positioned. Can be done.

After the rotating first gear 461 is attached to (shaft-supported) the first shaft 426, the jig is pulled out from the back side of the back case body 421. As a result, the assembly (shaft support) of the gears 451 to 462 to the back case body 421 (first shaft 426 and second shaft 427) is completed.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the jigs are erected in parallel to the sides of the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427 of the back case body 421, and the gears are inserted into the positioning holes 451e and the like. By assembling (shafting) the 451 to 462 to the first shaft 426, the second shaft 427, etc. in order, the rotation positions (phase, meshing position) of the gears 451 to 462 are positioned with reference to the back case body 421. can do. That is, since the jig can be inserted at the same time as the first shaft 426 and the second shaft 427 are inserted into the gears 451 to 462, the assembling work and the positioning work can be performed at the same time, and the workability is improved. Can be planned.

In particular, with respect to the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotary second gear 462, since the positioning hole 452e of the opening / closing second gear 452 is formed as a through hole, the second shaft of the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotary second gear 462. Assembling to 427 (shaft support) can be performed at the same time. In particular, in the present embodiment, since the positioning hole 471e of the back arm body 471 is formed as a through hole, the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotary second gear 462 are integrated with the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472. It can be assembled (shaft-supported) to the second shaft 427 with. Therefore, it is not necessary to assemble each arm body 471, 472 and each gear 452, 462 while positioning them, and the positioning work can be completed by one assembling work, and the workability can be improved.

Further, in this case, it is not necessary to prepare a dedicated jig for each of the opening / closing second gear 452, the rotary second gear 462, the back arm body 471, and the front arm body 472, and a common jig is used. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly. In addition
The opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 need to be able to rotate relative to each other independently of each other. However, if the jig is removed from the back case body 421 to the back side, the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 452 and the rotating second gear The 462 can be independently rotatable. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a rotating shaft for each of the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462, and these opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are used as a common rotating shaft (second shaft 427). Since it can be pivotally supported, the product cost can be reduced from this point as well.

On the other hand, the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 need to be connected to each other and rotate integrally in the same phase. In this case, the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are formed by inserting (internally fitting) the pair of connecting protrusions 451d of the opening / closing first gear 451 into the pair of connecting holes 461d of the rotating first gear 461. , The two gears 451 and 461 are connected to each other to enable positioning of the rotation position (phase) and integral rotation in the same phase at the same time. That is, the positioning of the rotation positions (phases) of the two gears 451 and 461 and the connection between the two gears 451 and 461 for integrated rotation can be shared by the connecting protrusion 451d and the communication hole 461d, and the rotation can be performed. It is not necessary to separately provide a through hole for positioning the position (that is, inserting a jig) and a connecting structure for integral rotation. As a result, the shapes of the double gears 451 and 461 can be simplified and the manufacturing yield can be improved. Further, since the number of through holes formed through the rotating first gear 461 (main body portion 461a) can be suppressed, the rigidity can be ensured and the durability can be improved accordingly.

In particular, a pair of communication holes 461d are formed as through holes in the rotary first gear 461, and a pair of connecting protrusions 451d of the opening / closing first gear 451 are inserted (internally fitted) into the pair of communication holes 461d. Therefore, the rigidity of the rotating first gear 461 (main body portion 461a) can be improved by the fitting structure.

Here, according to the positioning structure of the present embodiment, as described above, the jig is projected from the front surface of the back case body 421, and the gears 451 to 462 are sequentially moved while positioning the rotation position using the jig. When assembled (shaft-supported) to the first shaft 426, the second shaft 427, and the like, the jig can be removed from the back surface of the back case body 421 after the assembly of all the gears 451 to 462 is completed. That is, when assembling each of the gears 451 to 462, each of the gears 451 to 462 is maintained in a state in which the jig is inserted into the positioning holes 451e to 462e of the already assembled gears 451 to 462. Assembling work of the remaining gears 451 to 461 among the gears 451 to 462 can be performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operator from inadvertently rotating the gears 451 to 461 that have already been assembled during the work, so that workability can be improved and the reliability of the positioned rotation position can be improved. It is possible to improve the sex.

In the present embodiment, the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are arranged coaxially with the first shaft 426, and the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are arranged coaxially with the second shaft 427. Therefore, the back crash between the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452 and the back crash between the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 can be generated in the same direction. .. As a result, as will be described later, when the operating members 491 and 492 are opened and closed and rotated (see FIGS. 27 to 30), it is possible to prevent a deviation in the effect timing.

Next, the opening / closing operation of the operating members 491 and 492 will be described with reference to FIG. 26. 26 (a) to 26 (c) are exploded front views of the composite operation unit 400 for explaining the relative displacement state of the opening / closing second gear 452 and the slide rack member 481 with respect to the back arm body 471. The state in which the operating members 491 and 492 and the front arm body 472 are removed is shown. Note that FIG. 26 (a) shows that the opening / closing second gear 452 opens / closes counterclockwise (counterclockwise) with respect to FIG. 26 (b), and FIG. 26 (c) opens / closes with respect to FIG. 26 (b). The second gear 452 corresponds to a state in which the second gear 452 is rotated clockwise (clockwise).

As shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (c), a cylindrical portion (see FIGS. 21 and 22) of the back case body 271 is inserted into the insertion hole 452b of the opening / closing second gear 452. As a result, the opening / closing second gear 452 can rotate relative to the back case 271 about the second shaft 427.

As described above, the pair of first pinion leg members 482 are urged in a direction close to each other by the urging force of the urging spring 484 (see FIG. 22) erected between them. The shaft support hole 482b is rotatably supported by the shaft portion 471c of the arm body 471. That is, by receiving the urging force of the urging spring 484, the first pinion leg member 482 located on the right side of FIG. 26B of the pair of first pinion leg members 482 is counterclockwise around the shaft portion 471c. While being rotated (counterclockwise), the first pinion leg member 482 located on the left side of FIG. 26B is rotated clockwise (clockwise) about the shaft portion 471c. Therefore, the slide rack member 481 has the guide recesses 471d and 472d of both arm bodies 471 and 472 (FIGS. 21 and 22) due to the urging force of the urging spring 484 acting through the rotation of the pair of first pinion leg members 482. Along (see), the slide is displaced downward (in the direction away from the opening / closing second gear 452, the lower side in FIG. 26B).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 26B, when the opening / closing second gear 452 is not rotated against the urging force of the urging spring 484, the connecting protrusion 452d of the opening / closing second gear 452 slides. The distance L1 is defined as the distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 in the direction of slide displacement (vertical direction in FIG. 26B), which is attracted downward by the rack member 481 (lower side in FIG. 26B). .. Further, in the pair of first pinion leg members 482, the distance between the connecting holes 482d is set to the distance W1.

From the state shown in FIG. 26B, for example, when the opening / closing second gear 452 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) about the second axis 427 with respect to the back arm body 471, the connecting protrusion 452d is moved. By sliding in the connecting groove 481c of the slide rack member 481, the movement of the connecting protrusion 452d moves the slide rack member 481 upward (upper side in FIG. 26A) while resisting the urging force of the urging spring 484. Slide and displace.

That is, as shown in FIG. 26A, when the opening / closing second gear 452 is rotated to a predetermined rotation position, the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 in the direction of slide displacement (vertical direction in FIG. 26A) The distance between them is shortened to the distance L2 (L2 <L1), and the slide rack member 481 is slid upward by the difference between the distances L1 and L2. With the upward slide displacement of the slide rack member 481, the pair of first pinion leg members 482 are rotated in a direction in which they are separated from each other, and the distance between the connecting holes 482d is expanded to be the distance W2. (W1 <W2).

The pair of second pinion leg members 483 is also the same as the pair of first pinion leg members 482, and in the state shown in FIG. 26B, the postures are close to each other (the distance between the connecting holes 483d). Is arranged in the minimum state), and in the state shown in FIG. 26A, with the upward slide displacement of the slide rack member 481, the postures of being separated from each other (the distance between the connecting holes 483d is the maximum). Is placed in the state of

From the state shown in FIG. 26 (a), when the opening / closing second gear 452 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) about the second axis 427 with respect to the back arm body 471, the state shown in FIG. 26 (b). Will be returned to. From the state shown in FIG. 26B, when the opening / closing second gear 452 is further rotated clockwise (clockwise) about the second axis 427 with respect to the back arm body 471, the connecting protrusion 452d slides. By sliding in the connecting groove 481c of the rack member 481, the movement of the connecting protrusion 452d slides the slide rack member 481 upward (upper side in FIG. 26C) while resisting the urging force of the urging spring 484. Displace. As a result, when the opening / closing second gear 452 is rotated to a predetermined rotation position as in the case shown in FIG. 26 (a), the direction of slide displacement (FIG. 26 (c)) as shown in FIG. 26 (c). The distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 in the vertical direction) is shortened to the distance L2 (L2 <L1), and the slide rack member 481 is slid upward by the difference between the distances L1 and L2. To. With the upward slide displacement of the slide rack member 481, the pair of first pinion leg members 482 (and the second pinion leg member 483) are rotated in a direction away from each other and between their connecting holes 482d. The interval is expanded to the interval W2 (W1 <W2).

Next, the rotation operation and the opening / closing operation of the operation members 491 and 492 by the composite operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 30.

27 (a) to 27 (d) are front views of the combined operation unit 400 in which the opening / closing operation and the rotation operation of the operating members 491 and 492 are illustrated in chronological order. In FIG. 27 (a), the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged and opened at the ascending position U, and in FIG. 27 (b), the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged and closed at the ascending position U. In FIG. 27 (c), the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged and closed at the descending position D, and in FIG. 27 (d), the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged and closed at the descending position D. The opened state is shown in each figure.

28 to 30 are composite operation units schematically illustrating the meshing state of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452 and the meshing state of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462, respectively. It is a front schematic diagram of 400. 28 (a) is in the state of FIG. 27 (a), FIGS. 28 (b) and 29 (a) are in the state of FIG. 27 (b), and FIG. 29 (b) is in the state of FIG. 27 (b) and FIG. The transition states between FIGS. 27 (c), 29 (c) and 30 (a) correspond to the states of FIG. 27 (c), and FIG. 30 (b) correspond to the states of FIG. 27 (d). To do. Further, the same state is illustrated in FIGS. 28 (b) and 29 (a) and 29 (c) and 30 (a), respectively.

Here, in FIGS. 28 to 30, the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 are schematically illustrated by using the alternate long and short dash line. Further, in FIGS. 28 to 30, one of the connecting protrusions 451d of the pair of connecting protrusions 451d of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the connecting holes 461d of the pair of connecting holes 461d of the rotating first gear 461. A hatching is attached to each of the 461d, and the connecting protrusion 451d and the connecting hole 461d with the hatching will be described as a reference for rotation angles θ0 to θ4, which will be described later. That is, in the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotary first gear 462, the hatched connecting protrusion 451d is inserted (internally fitted) into the hatched connecting hole 461d, and these are arranged at the same rotational position.

Further, in FIGS. 28 to 30, the rotation of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 in a state in which the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged at the ascending position U and opened (the state shown in FIG. 27A). The position is the rotation angle θ0, and the rotation positions of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 in the state where the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged at the ascending position U and closed (the state shown in FIG. 27B). The opening / closing first gear in the state where the rotation angle θ1 and the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged and closed between the ascending position U and the descending position D (the state between FIGS. 27B and 27C). The rotation position of the 451 and the rotation first gear 461 is the rotation angle θ2, and the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing first gear 451 and the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged at the lowering position D and closed (the state shown in FIG. 27C). The rotation position of the rotation first gear 461 is the rotation angle θ3, and the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation th The rotation position of the 1 gear 461 is defined as the rotation angle θ4, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 27 (a) and 28 (a), when the rotation positions of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are at the rotation angle θ0, the operating members 491 and 492 move to the ascending position U. It is placed and opened. That is, the opening / closing second gear 452 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) to a predetermined rotation position with respect to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 around the second shaft 427, and the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 are rotated. By shortening the distance between them to the distance L2, the slide rack member 481 is brought into a state of being slid-displaced upward (in a direction approaching the second axis 427) (state shown in FIG. 26C).

In this case, in the rotary first gear 461 and the rotary second gear 462, the non-formed surface 462a1 of the main body portion 462a of the rotary second gear 462 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the main body portion 461a of the rotary first gear 461. .. As described above, the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 (main body portion 461a) is formed as a cylindrical surface centered on the first shaft 426, and the rotating second gear 462 (main body portion 462a) is not formed. The surface 462a1 is a curved surface that is recessed toward the second shaft 427 insertion hole 462b side (that is, has the center of curvature on the first shaft 426 side) and has the same curvature or slightly as the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461. It is formed as a curved surface with a small curvature (ie, a slightly larger radius).

Therefore, the second shaft 427 of the rotary second gear 462 (that is, the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 fixed to the rotary second gear 462) due to the contact between the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-formed surface 462a1. It is impossible to rotate around. That is, the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-formed surface 462a1 are used as stopper means for restricting the rotation of the rotating second gear 462 around the second shaft 427 (that is, holding the operating members 491 and 492 in the ascending position U). Can work.

Here, in a conventional gaming machine, an operating member that is rotatably arranged and a driving motor that applies a rotational driving force to the operating member are provided, and the operating member is rotated by a rotational driving force of the driving motor. Some rotate within a range. In this case, for example, when the end of the rotation range of the operating member is the ascending position and gravity is applied to the operating member arranged at the end of the rotating range, the operating member rotates (descends) due to the action of gravity. You need to avoid it. However, in a conventional gaming machine, the driving force of the driving motor is made to oppose gravity (weight of the operating member) to regulate the rotation (descending) of the operating member (that is, the operating member is held at the end of the rotation range). ) Due to the structure, the energy consumption required to hold the operating member is high.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged at the end of the rotation range (elevation position U), the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the rotation second of the rotation first gear 461 (main body portion 461a) are arranged. By abutting the non-formed surface 462a1 of the gear 462 (main body portion 462a), the rotational operation of the operating members 491 and 492 (rotational motion of the rotating second gear 462) can be regulated. That is, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged at the end of the rotation range (elevation position U), the operating members 491 and 492 and the drive motor 430 are separated from each other. Where it becomes impossible to hold the operating members 491 and 492 in the ascending position U by using the rotational driving force, the machine uses the contact between the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-formed surface 462a1 to move the operating members 491 and 492 to the ascending position U. Can be held as a target. As a result, the energy consumption required for holding the operating members 491 and 492 can be suppressed.

In this case, when the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 (main body portion 461a) and the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 (main body portion 462a) are in contact with each other (that is, the operating member 4911). When the 492 is arranged in the ascending position U (and the descending position D described later), it is possible to regulate the rotation of the rotating second gear 462 in both directions (rightward and counterclockwise) about the second axis 427. Since the rotating second gear 462 is formed in a proper shape, the rotation around the second axis 427 of the rotating second gear 462 is performed in only one direction (that is, the direction in which the operating members 491 and 492 are lowered toward the lowering position D by the action of gravity. Compared with the case where it is formed in a shape that can be regulated by (only), the vibrations of the operating members 491 and 492 when reaching the end of the moving range (rising position U (and descending position D described later)) are converged. , The operating members 491 and 492 can be quickly positioned at the end of the moving range. Further, since the operating members 491 and 492 can be held in a stable state at the end of the moving range, the operating members 491 and 492 that should be in the stopped state at the ascending position U (and the descending position D described later) are subjected to an external force (for example,). , Vibration and misalignment due to external force generated by the player hitting or shaking the gaming machine) can be suppressed.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 (main body portion 462a) is in contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 (main body portion 461a) (that is, the operating member 491). , 492 are arranged in the ascending position U (and the descending position D described later)), and are curved in an arc shape about the rotation axis (first axis 426) of the rotation first gear 461. It is formed by being curved in an arc shape having the same diameter as or slightly larger than the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first rotary gear 461.

As a result, the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 can be smoothly brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461, and both can be easily brought into contact with each other by surface contact. As a result, the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-formed surface 462a1 are smoothly brought into contact with each other, and the operating members 491 and 492 reach the end of the moving range (rising position U (and descending position D described later)) and are stopped. The impact can be relaxed, and the contact pressure between the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-formed surface 462a1 can be reduced to improve the durability of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462.

Here, as described above, the rotary second gear 462 is increased in rigidity by utilizing the rigidity of the front arm body 472 (that is, by being integrated with the front arm body 472). Therefore, it is not necessary to increase the wall thickness of the rotary second gear 462 or to use a high-rigidity material, thereby reducing the weight and cost of the rotary second gear 462 while maintaining the durability of the rotary second gear 462. Improvements are being made.

In particular, as described above, the rotary second gear 462 is located at a position where the connecting protrusion 462d faces the back surface side of the non-formed surface 462a1 (that is, the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotary first gear 461 across the non-formed surface 462a1). ), The rotation of the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 when it comes into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 at the ascending position U (and the descending position D described later). The rigidity of the portion that receives the reaction force from the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the first gear 461 can be effectively increased. As a result, it is possible to further achieve both weight reduction and cost reduction of the rotary second gear 462 and improvement of their durability.

Further, the connecting protrusion 462d of the rotating second gear 462 is arranged at a position facing the rotating shaft (first shaft 426) of the rotating first gear 461 with the non-formed surface 462a1 interposed therebetween. That is, the non-formed surface 462a1 is arranged on a straight line connecting the connecting protrusion 462d and the first axis 426. At the ascending position U (and the descending position D described later), when the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461, the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 is brought into contact with the cylindrical surface 461a1. Since the reaction force received from is applied along the straight line connecting the connecting protrusion 462d and the first shaft 426, the rotating second gear is located at a position facing the rotating shaft (first shaft 426) of the rotating first gear 461. By disposing the connecting protrusion 462d of the 462, it is possible to further exert the effect of increasing the rigidity of the portion that receives the reaction force from the rotating first gear 461 (cylindrical surface 461a1) by utilizing the front arm body 472. Further, since the metal fastening screw is inserted through the rolling convex portion 462d, the rigidity can be increased in that respect as well.

From the state shown in FIGS. 27 (a) and 28 (a), when the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrally rotated in the same phase from the rotation angle θ0 to the rotation angle θ1, they rotate. Since the first gear 461 and the rotary second gear 462 slip (slide) between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotary first gear 461 and the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotary second gear 462, the rotary first gear 461 The rotational driving force is not transmitted from the 461 to the rotary second gear 462, and the rotary second gear 462 (and the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472) is not rotated. As a result, the operating members 491 and 492 can be held in the ascending position U without rotating the operating members 491 and 492 (that is, in a state where the rotating operation is stopped).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical surface 461a1 is formed on the rotary first gear 461, and the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotary second gear 462 is opposed to the cylindrical surface 461a1 to face the above-described cutoff state (rotational first gear). Since the structure forms a state in which the rotational driving force is not transmitted from the 1st gear 461 to the rotary 2nd gear 462), the rigidity of the rotary 1st gear 462 can be improved.

That is, even when the teeth 461c are formed over the entire circumference of the rotary first gear 461 (the region corresponding to the cylindrical surface 461a1), the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotary second gear 462 is formed on the tooth tip surface of the teeth 461c. By sliding (sliding) them facing each other, the above-mentioned blocking state can be formed. However, in this case, the rigidity of the main body portion 461a of the rotating first gear 461 is lowered by the amount of the teeth 461c formed (concave). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical surface 451a1 is formed in the region facing the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 (the teeth 451c are not formed), so that the main body portion 461a of the rotating first gear 461 is formed accordingly. It is possible to improve the rigidity of the.

Further, when the teeth 461c are formed over the entire circumference of the rotary first gear 461 (the region corresponding to the cylindrical surface 461a1), the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotary second gear 462 is the tooth 461c of the rotary first gear 461. It is necessary that the tooth tip surface is retracted to the side of the second axis 427. As a result, the amount of retreat in the non-formed surface 462a1 formed portion of the rotating second gear 462 becomes large, and the rigidity thereof is lowered by that amount.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, a cylindrical surface 461a1 is formed on the rotating first gear 461, and the cylindrical surface 451a1 is formed between the tooth tip surface and the tooth bottom surface of the tooth 451c as described above. Therefore, the amount of retreat of the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 can be reduced. As a result, the protrusion amount of the non-formed surface 462a1 formed portion of the rotating second gear 462 is secured (suppressing that the retreat amount becomes large), and the rigidity of the non-formed surface 462a1 formed portion of the rotating second gear 462 is secured. Can be improved.

In particular, the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is formed as a curved surface that is recessed toward the second axis 427 side (that is, has the center of curvature on the first axis 426 side) as described above, and the teeth 462c. The cylindrical surface of the rotary first gear 461 is formed so as to project forward (that is, the shape in which the distance from the second shaft 427 increases) as the distance from the rotary first gear 461 increases. While enabling sliding with respect to 461a1 (formation of a cutoff state), the amount of protrusion at the non-formed surface 462a1 forming portion of the rotary second gear 462 can be increased to further increase its rigidity.

Since the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452 have teeth 451c and 452c of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452 meshed with each other, the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotary first gear 461 Are integrally rotated in the same phase from the rotation angle θ0 to the rotation angle θ1, the rotation of the opening / closing first gear 451 is transmitted to the opening / closing second gear 452, and the opening / closing second gear 452 is transferred to the back arm body 471 and the back arm body 471. It is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) relative to the front arm body 472 about the second axis 427.

As a result, the distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 is expanded to the distance L1, and the slide rack member 481 is slid downward (in the direction away from the second shaft 427) (see FIG. 26B). ). As a result, as shown in FIGS. 27 (b), 28 (b) and 29 (a), the open operating members 491 and 492 can be brought into a closed state. That is, while holding the operating members 491 and 492 in the ascending position U, the opening and closing operation can be executed to close the open operating members 491 and 492.

As shown in FIGS. 27 (b), 28 (b) and 29 (a), the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are rotated to the rotation angle θ1, and the operating members 491 and 492 are raised to the rising positions U. In the state of being arranged and closed, the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 reaches the end of the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461, and the teeth 461c of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462, The 462c are in the state just before the teeth are engaged.

Therefore, from the states shown in FIGS. 27 (b), 28 (b), and 29 (a), the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrally changed from the rotation angle θ1 to the rotation angle θ3 in the same phase. When rotated toward, the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 are formed by engaging the teeth 461c and 462c of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 with each other. The rotation of 461 is transmitted to the rotating second gear 462, and the rotating second gear 462 is integrated with the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 and rotated clockwise (clockwise) about the second axis 427. .. As a result, as shown in FIG. 29B, the operating members 491 and 492 can be rotated from the ascending position U to the descending position D.

On the other hand, as described above, the gear ratio (gear ratio) of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452 is the same as the gear ratio (gear ratio) of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462. Therefore, when the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are integrally rotated from the rotation angle θ1 to the rotation angle θ3 in the same phase, the opening / closing second gear 452 and the rotating second gear 462 are similarly rotated. It is rotated integrally in phase. That is, the opening / closing second gear 452 does not rotate relative to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, and as shown in FIG. 29B, these rotating second gear 462, the back arm body 471, and the opening / closing second gear 452 The front arm body 472 and the front arm body 472 are integrally rotated around the second axis 427 in the same phase. That is, the opening / closing operation of the operating members 491 and 492 can be stopped (the operating members 491 and 492 are held in the closed state).

As a result, when the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are further rotated from the rotation angle θ2, the opening / closing first operation is executed while holding the operating members 491 and 492 in the closed state. When the gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 reach the rotation angle θ3, as shown in FIGS. 27 (c) and 29 (c), the operating members 491 and 492 arranged at the ascending position U are moved to the descending position D. Can be placed in.

As shown in FIGS. 27 (c), 29 (c) and 30 (a), the operating members 491 and 492 are in a state where the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are rotated to the rotation angle θ3. It is placed in the descending position D and is in a closed state. In this case, the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 are disengaged from each other's teeth 461c and 462c, and the rotating second gear 462 is formed on the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the main body portion 461a of the rotating first gear 461. The non-formed surface 462a1 on the main body portion 462a of the above is brought into contact with the surface.

That is, the teeth 461c and 462c of the rotary first gear 461 and the rotary second gear 462 are disengaged from each other (the teeth cannot be meshed with each other), so that the rotary first gear 461 to the rotary second gear 462. It is possible to block the transmission of the rotational driving force to (form a cutoff state) to stop the rotation of the rotary second gear 462 (that is, the rotary operation of the operating members 491 and 492).

Here, in the conventional gaming machine, when the operating member is stopped, a sensor device for detecting the rotational position of the gear that transmits the rotational driving force of the drive motor to the operating member is provided, and the sensor device causes the gear to reach a predetermined rotational position. When it is detected that it has been rotated, or when the drive amount (number of rotations or steps) of the drive motor is detected (counted) and the drive amount reaches a predetermined amount, the operating members move. It was judged that the end of the range had been reached, and the drive of the drive motor was stopped. In this case, for example, the drive motor may not be stopped even though the operating member has reached the end of the moving range due to poor detection of the rotational position or the drive amount due to the influence of electrical noise. obtain. Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine, a stopper is provided at the end of the moving range of the moving member, and when the drive motor is not stopped properly, the stopper regulates the movement of the moving member. However, in such a structure in which the movement of the operating member is restricted by the stopper, when the operating member collides with the stopper, not only may the operating member and the stopper be damaged, but also an excessive load is applied to the drive motor. It may act and damage the drive motor.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, when the operating members 491 and 492 reach the end of the moving range (lowering position D), the teeth of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462 are changed. It can be released (as disengaged) to block the transmission of rotational driving force from the drive motor 430 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) to the operating members 491 and 492 (rotary second gear 462). As a result, the operating members 491 and 492 can be stopped even when the rotational driving force of the drive motor 430 continues to be generated.

As a result, damage due to collision between the operating members 491 and 492 and other members can be avoided. Further, even if the operating members 491 and 492 collide with other members, the operating members 491 and 492 are separated from the drive motor 430 (that is, the teeth of the rotating first gear 461 and the rotating second gear 462). Since the drive motor 430 is in a state of idling, it is possible to avoid an excessive load acting on the drive motor 430. As will be described later, the same applies when the operating members 491 and 492 are rotated from the descending position D toward the ascending position U and reach the ascending position U.

As described above, the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-formed surface 462a1 are formed as curved surfaces having shapes corresponding to each other. Therefore, the second shaft 427 of the rotary second gear 462 (that is, the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 fixed to the rotary second gear 462) due to the contact between the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-formed surface 462a1. It is impossible to rotate around. That is, the stopper means that allows the cylindrical surface 461a1 and the non-formed surface 462a1 to regulate the rotation of the rotating second gear 462 about the second shaft 427 (that is, the operating members 491 and 492 can be held in the lowered position D). Can function as.

From the states shown in FIGS. 27 (c), 29 (c), and 30 (a), the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are integrally in the same phase from the rotation angle θ3 to the rotation angle θ4. When rotated, the rotary first gear 461 and the rotary second gear 462 slip (slide) between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotary first gear 461 and the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotary second gear 462. Therefore, the rotational driving force is not transmitted from the rotary first gear 461 to the rotary second gear 462, and the rotary second gear 462 (and the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472) is not rotated. As a result, the rotating operation of the operating members 491 and 492 can be stopped (that is, the operating members 491 and 492 are held at the descending position D).

On the other hand, in the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452, since the teeth 451c and 452c of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the opening / closing second gear 452 are meshed with each other, the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation first When the gears 461 are integrally rotated in the same phase from the rotation angle θ3 to the rotation angle θ4, the rotation of the opening / closing first gear 451 is transmitted to the opening / closing second gear 452, and the opening / closing second gear 452 is the back arm body. It is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) relative to the 471 and the front arm body 472 about the second axis 427.

As a result, the distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 is shortened to the distance L2, and the slide rack member 481 is slid upward (in the direction closer to the second shaft 427) (see FIG. 26 (c)). ). As a result, as shown in FIGS. 27 (d) and 30 (b), the closed operating members 491 and 492 can be brought into an open state. That is, while holding the operating members 491 and 492 in the descending position D, the opening and closing operation can be executed to open the closed operating members 491 and 492.

As shown in FIGS. 27 (d) and 30 (b), after the operating members 491 and 492 are arranged at the descending position D and are in the open state, the drive motor 430 (FIGS. 21 and 22) is then moved. (See) is rotationally driven in the opposite direction to the above-mentioned case, and the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating first gear 461 are integrally rotated in the same phase from the rotation angle θ4 to the rotation angle θ0. The operations (open / close operation and rotation operation) can be executed in the reverse order.

That is, from the state of the rotation angle θ4 shown in FIGS. 27 (d) and 30 (b), the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrally rotated to the rotation angle θ3 in the same phase. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 27 (c), 29 (c) and 30 (a), the sliding between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 and the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462. Using (sliding), while stopping the rotational operation of the operating members 491 and 492 (that is, holding the operating members 491 and 492 in the descending position D), the opening / closing second gear 452 is clockwise (clockwise). ), The distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 can be increased to the distance L1, and the open operating members 491 and 492 can be closed. That is, while holding the operating members 491 and 492 in the descending position D, the opening and closing operation can be executed to close the open operating members 491 and 492.

Next, from the state of the rotation angle θ3 shown in FIGS. 27 (c), 29 (c) and 30 (a), the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrated in the same phase through the rotation angle θ2. Rotate to the rotation angle θ1. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 27 (b) and 29 (a), the rotating second gear 462 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) integrally with the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, and the operating member. While rotating 491 and 492 from the descending position D to the ascending position U, the opening / closing second gear 452 does not rotate relative to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472, and is combined with the rotating second gear 462. The back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 can be integrally rotated about the second axis 427 in the same phase. That is, while holding the operating members 491 and 492 in the closed state, the rotational operation can be executed to arrange the operating members 491 and 492 arranged at the descending position D at the ascending position U.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when starting the rotational operation for moving the operating members 491 and 492 from the descending position D to the ascending position U, only the opening and closing operations of the operating members 491 and 492 are performed first. After that, the operating members 491 and 492 are rotated. That is, after forming a cutoff state in which the rotational driving force of the drive motor 430 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) is blocked from being transmitted to the rotary second gear 462, the rotary drive force of the drive motor 430 is applied to the rotary second gear. Since the transmission state to be transmitted to 462 is formed, the rotational driving force required for the drive motor 430 to start the rotational operation of the operating members 491 and 492 can be suppressed, and as a result, the drive motor 430 is miniaturized. be able to.

That is, when the rotating operation of the operating members 491 and 492 in the stopped state (that is, the ascending position U or the descending position D) is started, the stationary object is moved. It is necessary to apply a force exceeding the generated inertial force to the operating members 491 and 492, and the rotational driving force required for the drive motor 430 becomes large. In particular, the rotational operation of the operating members 491 and 992 is performed not only by the operating members 491 and 492, but also by a mechanism portion (for example, a slide rack member 481 and each pinion leg member 482, 483) that opens and closes the operating members 491 and 492. Etc.) and the entire arm body 471, 472 that holds the mechanical portion thereof must be moved, and the inertial force at the start of the rotational operation becomes large. Further, when rotating the operating members 491 and 492 at the descending position D toward the ascending position D, it is necessary to resist the weight (action of gravity) of the operating members 491 and 492 in addition to the inertial force. .. Therefore, the size of the drive motor 430 is increased.

On the other hand, after the rotational operation of the operating members 491 and 492 is started, the action of inertia that tries to maintain the moving state of the operating members 491 and 492 acts, so that the rotation required for the drive motor 430 is required. The driving force is smaller than the rotational driving force required when starting the rotational operation of the operating members 491 and 492. In other words, after the movement of the operating members 491 and 492 is started, it can be said that the drive motor 430 having an unnecessarily large maximum output is in use.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, first, the rotational driving force is utilized by utilizing the sliding (sliding) between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotary first gear 461 and the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotary second gear 462. Can be rotationally driven in a state in which is not transmitted to the rotary second gear 462 (a cutoff state, a state during the transition from FIG. 30 (b) to FIG. 30 (a)), and the drive motor 430 can be rotationally driven. Momentum (inertial force on the rotation first gear 461 side) can be given to the driving state. After that, the rotary first gear 461 is meshed with the rotary second gear 462 (that is, a transmission state is formed) (see the state of transition from FIG. 29 (c) to FIG. 29 (b)). The rotational operation of the operating members 491 and 492 can be started in a state where the rotational drive of the drive motor 430 has momentum. As a result, even if the drive motor 430 is miniaturized, the moving members 491 and 492 can be started to move. In other words, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the drive motor 430 having an unnecessarily large maximum output is used after the rotational operation of the operating members 491 and 492 is started.

In particular, in this shutoff state, the operating members 491 and 492 are opened and closed, but in the opening and closing operation, the only objects that are moved (moved or displaced) by the driving force of the drive motor 430 are the operating members 491 and 492. It is not necessary to move the entire mechanism including the mechanical parts and the arm bodies 471 and 472 in addition to the moving members 491 and 492, as in the case of the rotary operation. Therefore, the load of the drive motor 430 is small, and it is possible to give sufficient momentum (inertial force to the rotation first gear 461 side) in the drive state.

The cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotary first gear 461 and the non-formed surface 462a1 of the rotary second gear 462 are formed on both sides of the teeth 461c and 462c, and are cylindrical at the two positions of the ascending position U and the descending position D. A state in which the non-formed surface 462a is in contact with the surface 461a1 (blocking state) can be formed. Therefore, not only when the movement of the operating members 491 and 492 at the descending position D to the ascending position U is started, but also when the moving of the operating members 491 and 492 at the ascending position U to the descending position D is started. In addition, it is possible to give momentum (inertial force) to the driving state of the driving motor 430.

From the state of the rotation angle θ1 shown in FIGS. 27 (b), 28 (b) and 29 (a), the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotation first gear 461 are integrally rotated to the rotation angle θ0 in the same phase. .. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 27 (a) and 28 (a), sliding (sliding) between the cylindrical surface 461a1 of the rotating first gear 461 and the non-forming surface 462a1 of the rotating second gear 462 is utilized. Then, while stopping the rotational operation of the operating members 491 and 492 (that is, holding the operating members 491 and 492 in the ascending position U), the opening / closing second gear 452 is rotated clockwise (clockwise). The distance between the connecting groove 481c and the second shaft 427 can be shortened to the distance L2 so that the closed operating members 491 and 492 are in an open state. That is, while holding the operating members 491 and 492 in the ascending position U, the opening and closing operation can be executed to open the closed operating members 491 and 492.

As described above, according to the composite operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 (first moving member) that are rotated (rotated) about the second axis 427, and their backs. An operating member 491, 492 (second moving member) arranged on the arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 and opened / closed (opening / closing operation) in a direction close to each other is provided, and the operating member 491, 492 (second moving member) is provided. ) Is stopped while the rotation operation of the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 (first moving member) is stopped (see FIGS. 28 and 30), while the operating members 491 and 492 (second moving member). While the opening / closing operation of is stopped, the combined operation of rotating the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 (first moving member) (see FIG. 29) can be executed by the drive motor 430 of 1.

Here, in the conventional gaming machine, when the moving operation of the first moving member and the second moving member is performed by one drive motor, the drive motor generates a driving force and the driving force is stopped. Since the structure is such that the operation modes of the first moving member and the second moving member are switched by forming the two driving states, both the first moving member and the second moving member move together or both stop. It was possible to form only the operation mode of moving, and it was not possible to move one of the first moving member or the second moving member and stop the other. Therefore, in order to move one of the first moving member or the second moving member and stop the other, a drive motor for moving the first moving member and a drive motor for moving the second moving member are used. It was necessary to provide each individually, that is, to provide a total of two drive motors.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, one of the moving members 491 and 492 (second moving member) or the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 (first moving member) is operated while the other is operated. Since the operation mode of stopping can be achieved by the drive motor 430 of 1, the required number of drive motors 430 is reduced while enhancing the effect of moving and stopping the operating members 491 and 492, and the product cost is reduced accordingly. Can be planned.

Next, the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 45.

FIG. 31 is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 in a state where the first engaging member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged at the retracted positions, and FIG. 32 is a front view of the first coupling operating unit 500 and the second coupling operating unit 600. It is a front view of the 1st coupling operation unit 500 and the 2nd coupling operation unit 600 in the state where the 1st engagement member 539 and the pair of 2nd coupling member 630 are arranged at the coupling position. The arrangement positions (opposite distances) of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 shown in FIGS. 31 and 32 are in a state where both units 500 and 600 are housed in the rear case 210. Corresponds to the arrangement position (opposite spacing).

As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the first coupling operation unit 500 includes a first engaging member 539 formed so as to be able to move up and down via a slide mechanism, and the second coupling operation unit 600 is linked. A pair of second coupling members 630 that are swingably formed to the left and right via a mechanism are provided, and second coupling operation units 600 are arranged below the first coupling operation unit 500 at predetermined intervals. A third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the back side (back side of the paper surface of FIGS. 31 and 32) of the space located between the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600. Will be set up.

The first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 move the first engaging member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 up and down and swing, respectively, to show the retracted position shown in FIG. 31 or FIG. 32. Place at the join position. At the retracted position shown in FIG. 31, the first engaging member 539 is raised, and the pair of second coupling members 630 are separated from each other to the left and right due to the tilt of the link mechanism, so that the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) The front side is in an open state (see FIG. 6). On the other hand, at the coupling position shown in FIG. 32, the first engaging member 539 is lowered and the pair of second coupling members 630 are brought close to each other by the standing of the link mechanism, and the first engaging member 539 and the pair of first engaging members 539 and the pair of first engaging members are brought close to each other. The two coupling members 630 are arranged on the front surface side of the third symbol display device 81 and are coupled to each other (see FIG. 12).

In this case, according to the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600, the first engaging member 539 is lowered toward the pair of second coupling members 630 arranged side by side on the left and right, and the first engaging member 539 is lowered. When the lower surface 539e of the 1 engaging member 539 is brought into contact with the respective upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630, a force in the direction of bringing them closer to each other is applied to the pair of second coupling members 630. As a result, not only the lower surface 539e of the first engaging member 539 and the upper surface 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 can be brought into close contact with each other, but also the facing surfaces of the pair of second coupling members 630 adjacent to each other on the left and right are brought into close contact with each other. Can be made to. As a result, these connecting members 539 and 630 can be bonded while suppressing the formation of a gap between them. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect by connecting the plurality of members.

First, the first coupling operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 41.

33 (a) is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500, and FIG. 33 (b) is a bottom view of the first coupling operation unit 500 in the direction of arrow XXXb of FIG. 33 (a). Further, FIG. 34 is an exploded front perspective view of the first coupling operation unit 500, and FIG. 35 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first coupling operation unit 500. In FIG. 35, the raising member 550 and the decorative portion 560 are not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 33 to 35, the first coupling operation unit 500 includes a substrate member 510, a drive unit 520 that is arranged on the front side of the substrate member 510 and generates a driving force, and a drive unit 520 thereof. The driving force of the driving unit 520 is transmitted to the slide mechanism unit 530 arranged on the front side of the base member 510 and the sliding mechanism unit 530, while being slid displacement (elevated) in the vertical direction in response to the driving force generated by. A first link member 541 that is arranged on the back side of the substrate member 510 and a second link member that is arranged on the back side of the substrate member 510 in a posture symmetrical to the first link member 541. 542, a pair of raising members 550 arranged on the left and right sides of the slide mechanism portion 530 on the front side of the substrate member 510, a decorative portion 560 arranged on the front side of the pair of raising members 550, and a substrate. It mainly includes an urging spring 571 that is arranged on the front side of the member 510 and applies an urging force to the second link member 542.

The raising member 550 is formed in a box shape with the back side open, and the drive unit 520 arranged on the front side of the substrate member 510 can be accommodated in the internal space of the raising member 550. As a result, as will be described later, even when the drive unit 520 is arranged on the front surface side of the substrate member 510, the dead space formed on the front surface side of the substrate member 510 and on the side of the slide mechanism unit 530 is effectively used. It can be utilized, and the size of the first coupling operation unit 500 can be reduced particularly in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33B).

The substrate member 510 is a member formed in a horizontally long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front, and is a rack portion arranged side by side along a pair of guide grooves 511 and one of the pair of guide grooves 511. The 512, the connecting grooves 513 and 514 formed on the left and right sides of the pair of guide grooves 511, the shaft support holes 515 formed on the side of the connecting groove 513, and the front side and the back side of the substrate member 510, respectively. It mainly includes a support shaft 516 that is projected.

The guide groove 511 allows the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 to be inserted from the front side to the back side of the substrate member 510, and the insertion shaft 531c and the link members 541 and 542 can be connected to each other on the back side of the substrate member 510. This is a groove-shaped opening for the purpose of the substrate member 510, and the pair extends linearly along the vertical direction while maintaining parallelism with each other at substantially the center in the width direction of the substrate member 510. The width of the guide groove 511 is set to be larger than the outer diameter of the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530, and the insertion shaft 531c can be moved only along the extending direction of the guide groove 511. That is, the slide mechanism portion 530 can move (elevate) in the vertical direction along the extending direction of the guide groove 511 by guiding the insertion shaft 531c to the guide groove 511.

The rack portion 512 is a portion formed as a rack gear in which a plurality of teeth 512a are engraved on a plane along the extending direction of the guide groove 511, and is fixed to the front side of the substrate member 510. When the slide mechanism portion 520 is assembled to the substrate member 510, the pinion gear 537 (see FIG. 38) of the slide mechanism portion 530 is engaged with the teeth 512a of the rack portion 512. Therefore, when the slide mechanism portion 530 is moved (elevated) along the extending direction of the guide groove 511, the pinion gear 537 is rotationally driven along with the movement of the slide mechanism portion 530.

The connecting groove 513 has a groove shape for inserting the connecting shaft 526 of the drive unit 520 from the front side to the back side of the substrate member 510 and connecting the connecting shaft 526 and the first link member 541 on the back side of the substrate member 510. It is an opening of the above, and is curved and extended in an arc shape that is convex toward the guide groove 511. Specifically, the connecting groove 513 is formed in a shape obtained by cutting out a part of an annular shape centered on the axis of the shaft support hole 515. The width of the connecting groove 513 is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the connecting shaft 526 of the drive unit 520, and the connecting shaft 526 can be moved only along the extending direction of the connecting groove 513.

The shaft support hole 515 is an opening for inserting a support shaft 527 that pivotally supports the base end side of the first link member 541, and is arranged on the opposite side of the guide groove 511 with the connecting groove 513 interposed therebetween. As will be described later, the support shaft 527 is fixed to the case body 521 of the drive unit 520, and the drive unit 520 is arranged on the front side of the substrate member 510, so that the tip of the support shaft 527 is a shaft support hole. It is projected to the back surface side of the substrate member 510 via 515. The first link member 541 is pivotally supported on the base end side by a support shaft 527 protruding through a shaft support hole 515, and is rotated about the support shaft 527.

The connecting groove 514 is formed by inserting the locking claw 542b of the second link member 542 from the back side to the front side of the substrate member 510 and forming the end portion of the urging spring 542 in the locking claw 542b on the front side of the substrate member 510. It is a groove-shaped opening for allowing the groove to be formed, and is curved and extended in an arc shape that is convex toward the guide groove 511. That is, the connecting groove 514 is formed as an opening having a size that allows the locking claw 542b to move when the second link member 542 is rotated about the support shaft 516.

The support shaft 516 is a shaft body for axially supporting the second link member 542 and the urging spring 571, and as described above, the support shaft 516 projects from the front side and the back side of the substrate member 510, respectively. The support shaft 516 is arranged at a position that is line-symmetric with the shaft support hole 515, with a virtual straight line passing through the middle of the pair of guide grooves 511 as a line of symmetry. The base end side (shaft support hole 542a) of the second link member 542 is pivotally supported by a support shaft 516 projecting from the back surface side of the substrate member 510, and the second link member 542 is rotated about the support shaft 516. Further, the urging spring 571 is held by a support shaft 516 projecting from the front side of the substrate member 510.

The urging spring 571 is formed as a torsion coil spring, the coil portion thereof is held (guided) by the support shaft 516, and one arm portion of the pair of arm portions engages with the second link member 542. It is locked to the stop claw 542b, and the other arm is locked to the locking claw 517 of the substrate member 510. The urging spring 571 is arranged in a state where the pair of arms are elastically deformed in a direction close to each other, and the elastic recovery force pushes up the locking claw 542b of the second link member 542 upward (FIG. FIG. Bounce towards (34 and the upper side of FIG. 35). That is, the urging force of the urging spring 571 is applied in the direction of holding the second link member 542 in the posture shown in FIG. 35 (the posture in which the tip end side is positioned on the upper end side of the guide groove 511).

The drive unit 520 is a unit for generating a driving force for sliding displacement (elevation) of the slide mechanism unit 530 in the vertical direction, and is on the front side of the substrate member 510 and on the side of the slide mechanism unit 530. Displaced. Here, the drive unit 520 will be described with reference to FIG. 36.

FIG. 36 is a rear view of the drive unit 520. In FIG. 36, the positions of the connecting groove 513 and the shaft support hole 515 of the substrate member 510 in a state where the drive unit 520 is assembled to the substrate member 510 are schematically illustrated by using the alternate long and short dash line.

As shown in FIG. 36, the drive unit 520 is arranged on the front side of the case body 521 and the case body 521, and the drive shaft is projected to the back side of the case body 521 (FIGS. 34 and FIG. 35), a pinion gear 523 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 522, and a rotation shaft 524a rotatably supported by a rotation shaft 524a which is meshed with the pinion gear 523 and protrudes from the back surface of the case body 521. A crank gear 524, a connecting rod 525 whose one end is rotatably supported by the crank gear 524 via a rotating shaft 525a, a connecting shaft 526 projecting from the other end of the connecting rod 525, and a case body 521. Mainly includes a support shaft 527 projecting from the back surface of the. The drive shaft, the rotation shafts 524a, 525a, the connecting shaft 526, and the support shaft 527 of the drive motor 522 are arranged in parallel with each other.

The rotating shaft 525a, which rotatably supports one end of the connecting rod 525 to the crank gear 524, is arranged at a position eccentric with respect to the rotating shaft 524a of the crank gear 524, and is connected so as to project from the other end of the connecting rod 525. As described above, the shaft 526 is inserted into the connecting groove 513 of the substrate member 510 and is movable only along the extending direction of the connecting groove 513. Therefore, the crank gear 524, the rotating shaft 525a, and the connecting rod 525 constitute a crank mechanism that converts the rotational motion of the crank gear 524 into the reciprocating motion of the connecting shaft 526 via the connecting rod 525.

That is, when the pinion gear 523 is rotated by the rotational drive of the drive motor 522 and the crank gear 524 is rotated in one direction (for example, the arrow A1 direction) by the rotation, the connecting shaft 526 is along the extending direction of the connecting groove 513. When the drive motor 522 is rotationally driven in the opposite direction and the crank gear 524 is rotated in the other direction (arrow A2 direction) while being displaced in one direction (arrow B1 direction), the moving direction of the connecting shaft 526 is reversed. Then, the connecting shaft 526 is displaced in the other direction (direction of arrow B2) along the extending direction of the connecting groove 513.

When the drive unit 520 (case body 521) is assembled to the front side of the substrate member 510, as described above, the connecting shaft 526 and the support shaft 527 are formed in the connecting groove 513 and the support hole 515 of the substrate member 510, respectively. It is inserted, and the tip of the connecting shaft 526 and the tip of the support shaft 527 are projected toward the back surface side of the substrate member 510, respectively (see FIGS. 34 and 35).

In this case, the connecting shaft 526 is rotatably connected to the longitudinal intermediate portion (connecting hole 541b) of the first link member 541, and the support shaft 527 is rotatably connected to the base end portion (shaft support hole 541a) of the first link member 541. By rotating the drive motor 522 to displace the connecting shaft 526 along the connecting groove 513 (in the direction of arrow B1 or in the direction of arrow B2), the first link member 541 is supported by the support shaft. It can be rotated around 527.

It will be described back from FIG. 33 to FIG. 35. The first link member 541 is a member for connecting the connecting shaft 526 of the drive unit 520 and the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism unit 530 and transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 522 to the slide mechanism unit 530. It is formed in the shape of a plate. The first link member 541 is formed with a shaft support hole 541a at the base end portion, a connecting hole 541b at the intermediate portion in the longitudinal direction, and a sliding hole 541c at the tip end portion opposite to the base end portion.

The shaft support hole 541a and the connection hole 541b are formed as through holes having a circular shape in front view, and the shaft support shaft 527 and the connection shaft 526 of the drive unit 520 are rotatably inserted, respectively. On the other hand, the sliding hole 541c is formed as a through hole having a long hole shape in front view along the major axis direction in the longitudinal direction of the first link member 541, and can slide along the long hole shape (major axis direction). The insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 is inserted.

Therefore, when the first link member 541 is rotated around the support hole 541a in the direction of raising the sliding hole 541c (direction of arrow B1, see FIG. 36), the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 becomes the substrate member 510. The slide mechanism portion 530 is displaced upward along the guide groove 511, while the first link member 541 lowers the sliding hole 541c around the support hole 541a (arrow B2 direction, see FIG. 36). When rotated to, the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 is displaced downward along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and the slide mechanism portion 530 is lowered (see FIGS. 40 and 41).

Here, in the present embodiment, the connecting rod 525 is arranged on the front side of the substrate member 510, and the first link member 541 is arranged on the back side of the substrate member 510, and the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 are arranged. Since they are connected (connected) to each other via the connecting groove 513 of the board member 510, they are connected to the driving force transmission path (that is, the rotating shaft 524a of the crank gear 524) formed by these connecting rods 525 and the first link member 541. Length dimension of the part connecting the shaft 526 (connecting rod 525) and the part connecting the connecting shaft 526 and the insertion shaft 531c (the part from the connecting hole 541b to the sliding hole 541c of the first link member 541). ) Becomes longer. Therefore, when the driving force of the driving motor 522 is transmitted, the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 may be deformed, and the driving force may not be stably transmitted to the slide mechanism portion 530 (insertion shaft 531c).

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the base end side (shaft support hole 541a) is rotatably supported by the support shaft 527 on the back surface of the substrate member 510 on the first link member 541. Utilizing the rigidity of the case body 521 of the drive unit 520 to which the shaft 527 is fixed and the substrate member 510 to which the case body 521 is fastened and fixed, the rigidity of the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 as a whole is increased. Can be done. As a result, when the driving force of the driving motor 522 is transmitted, the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 are suppressed from being deformed, and the driving force is stably transmitted to the slide mechanism portion 530 (insertion shaft 531c). can do.

In particular, in the present embodiment, since the first link member 541 (shaft support hole 541a) of the connecting rod 525 and the first link member 541 is rotatably supported by the substrate member 510, the connecting rod 525 is rotatably supported by the substrate member 510. The transmission path of the driving force from the portion pivotally supported by the substrate member 510 to the slide mechanism portion 530 (insertion shaft 531c) can be shortened as compared with the case where the shaft is rotatably supported. The transmission to the slide mechanism portion 530 (insertion shaft 531c) can be further stabilized.

The second link member 542 is a member for connecting the urging spring 571 and the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 and transmitting the urging force of the urging spring 571 to the slide mechanism portion 530, and is a long plate. It is formed in a shape. Similar to the first link member 541, the second link member 542 is formed with a shaft support hole 542a and a sliding hole 542c at the base end portion and the tip end portion, respectively. The support shaft 516 of the substrate member 510 is rotatably inserted into the shaft support hole 542a, and the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530 is inserted into the sliding hole 542c. Further, a locking claw 542b is formed in the intermediate portion in the longitudinal direction of the second link member 542. As described above, the locking claw 542b is arranged on the front side of the substrate member 510 via the connecting groove 514, and locks the arm portion of the urging spring 571.

Therefore, since the second link member 542 holds the slide mechanism portion 530 symmetrically with the first link member 541, the slide displacement of the slide mechanism portion 530 can be stably performed. Further, the urging force of the urging spring 571 acts on the slide mechanism portion 530 in the ascending direction (the direction in which the tip side (sliding hole 542c) of the second link member 542 is raised) via the second link member 542. Therefore, when raising the slide mechanism unit 530, the driving force of the driving unit 520 can be assisted. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the size of the drive motor 522.

The support shafts 527 and 516 inserted into the shaft support holes 541a and 542a of the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 are equipped with a retaining ring E formed as an E ring as a retaining ring. , The insertion shaft 531c inserted into the sliding holes 541c and 542c of the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 has a seating surface having a diameter larger than the groove width of the sliding holes 541c and 542c as a retaining ring. A fastening screw with a head or washer) is fastened (see FIG. 35).

Here, with respect to the first link member 541, the attachment of the retaining ring E as a retaining ring or the fastening of the fastening screw to the connecting shaft 526 inserted into the connecting hole 541b of the first link member 541 is omitted. That is, by providing a retainer on two of the three shafts (support shaft 527 and insertion shaft 531c), the retainer can be omitted for the remaining one (connecting shaft 526). The number of parts required to prevent slipping can be reduced. In particular, the two shafts of the long first link member 541 on the proximal end side and the distal end side are prevented from coming off, and the shaft at a position intermediate between the proximal end side and the distal end side is prevented from coming off. By adopting a structure in which the above is omitted, the first link member 451 can be stably rotated while suppressing the shaft (connecting shaft 526) from which the retaining is omitted from coming off from the connecting hole 541b.

As described above, the slide mechanism portion 530 is a mechanism portion that slides (elevates) in the vertical direction along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and lowers the first engaging member 539 to a predetermined position. Then, it is coupled to the second coupling member 630 of the second coupling operation unit 600 (see FIG. 32). Here, the slide mechanism unit 530 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 39.

FIG. 37 (a) is a front perspective view of the slide mechanism portion 530, and FIG. 37 (b) is a rear perspective view of the slide mechanism portion 530. Further, FIG. 38 is a front perspective view of the slide mechanism unit 530 with the disassembled slide mechanism unit 530 viewed from the front, and FIG. 39 is a rear perspective view of the slide mechanism unit 530 with the disassembled slide mechanism unit 530 viewed from the rear. is there.

As shown in FIGS. 37 to 39, the slide mechanism portion 530 includes an A layer base plate 531, a B layer base plate 532 and a B layer decorative body 533, a C layer base plate 534 and a C layer decorative body 535, and the like. A 1-pinion gear 537, a 2nd pinion gear 538, and a 1st coupling member 539 are provided, and the 1st coupling member 539 is slid up and down by a driving force transmitted from the drive unit 520 via the 1st link member 541. Move up and down).

According to the slide mechanism portion 530 of the present embodiment, two sets of double rack and pinion structures are interposed between the A layer base plate 531 and the first coupling member 539, and the first link member 541 to the A layer base. The driving force received by the plate 531 is transmitted to the first coupling member 539 via the two sets of double rack and pinion structures, thereby accelerating the slide displacement (elevation) of the first coupling member 539. Is configured to be able to.

The A-layer base plate 531 includes a main body portion 531a formed in a vertically long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front, and a guide groove 531b which is a groove-shaped opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 531a. , A plurality of insertion shafts 531c (six in total in this embodiment) that are projected from the back surface of the main body portion 531a and are arranged side by side with the guide groove 531b interposed therebetween, and a protrusion toward the front side of the main body portion 531a. It is provided with a support shaft 531d that rotatably supports the first pinion gear 537.

In the A-layer base plate 531, a plurality of insertion shafts 531c are inserted into the guide grooves 511 of the substrate member 510, respectively, and the collar C having a diameter larger than the groove width of the guide groove 511 at the tip of the inserted insertion shafts 531c. Is fastened and fixed to the substrate member 510 so that it can be slidably displaced (elevated) (see FIG. 35). In this case, the first pinion gear 537 pivotally supported by the support shaft 531d is meshed with the rack portion 512 of the substrate member 510.

In the present embodiment, two of the plurality of insertion shafts 531c are inserted into the sliding holes 541c and 542c of the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 as described above. At the top, fasten the fastening screw to the tip as a retainer.

Further, in the present embodiment, the plurality of insertion shafts 531c are located on the upper side (upper side of FIG. 39) of the center in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction of FIG. 39) of the A layer base plate 531. Therefore, as will be described later, when the slide mechanism portion 530 is in a forward leaning posture toward the front side of the substrate member 510 due to its own weight, the forward leaning posture is changed to the collar C, the first link member 541, and the first link member 510. It can be effectively regulated by the two-link member 542, and as a result, the slide mechanism portion 530 (A layer base plate 531) can be slid displacement (elevated) in a stable state.

The B-layer base plate 532 includes a main body portion 532a formed in a vertically long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front, a plurality of insertion holes 532b formed through the main body portion 532a, and a plurality of protrusions protruding from the back surface of the main body portion 532a. 532c, and a rack portion 532d in which a plurality of teeth are engraved as rack gears along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 532a on the side surface of the main body portion 532a.

The B-layer base plate 532 is formed by inserting a plurality of insertion shafts 532c into the guide grooves 531b of the A-layer base plate 531 and fastening the insertion screws to the tips of the inserted insertion shafts 532c as a retaining screw. It is held on the A-layer base plate 531 so that it can be slidably displaced (elevated).

In this case, the rack portion 532d arranged on the side surface of the B layer base plate 532 (main body portion 532a) is meshed with the first pinion gear 537 pivotally supported by the A layer base plate 531 (support shaft 531d). That is, the first pinion gear 537 is meshed with both the rack portion 512 of the substrate member 510 and the rack portion 532d of the B layer base plate 532, whereby the first set of double rack pinion structure is formed. Therefore, when the A-layer base plate 531 is slidably displaced (elevated) with respect to the substrate member 510, the B-layer base plate 532 with respect to the A-layer base plate 531 via the first set of double rack and pinion structures. The slide is displaced (elevated). That is, the B-layer base plate 532 is slidably displaced (elevated) with respect to the substrate member 510 in a state where the speed is higher than that of the A-layer base plate 531.

The B-layer decorative body 533 is a member that forms a decorative portion that is visible to the player from the front side, is fixed to the B-layer base plate 532, and is slidably displaced (elevated) together with the B-layer base plate 532. Will be done. Specifically, the B-layer decorative body 533 includes a plurality of insertion shafts 533a projecting from the back surface thereof, and fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 532b of the B-layer base plate 532 are fastened to the insertion shafts 533a. As a result, it is fixed to the front side of the B layer base plate 532.

The plurality of insertion shafts 533a of the B-layer decorative body 533 are inserted into the guide groove 539b of the first coupling member 539 and the guide groove 534b of the C-layer base plate 534, and then fixed to the B-layer base plate 532. .. In this case, the insertion shaft 532a of one of the plurality of insertion shafts 532a of the B-layer decorative body 533 pivotally supports the second pinion gear 538. Therefore, when the B-layer decorative body 533 and the B-layer base plate 532 are slidably displaced (elevated) with respect to the A-layer base plate 531, the second pinion gear 538 is also slid-displaced (elevated and lowered) with respect to the A-layer base plate 531. ).

The C-layer base plate 534 includes a main body portion 534a formed in a vertically long rectangular plate shape when viewed from the front, and a guide groove 534b which is a groove-shaped opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 534a. A plurality of insertion holes 534c formed through the main body portion 534a, and a rack portion 534d in which a plurality of teeth are engraved as rack gears along the guide groove 534b on the front surface side of the main body portion 532a are provided.

The C-layer decorative body 535 is a member that forms a decorative portion that is visible to the player from the front side, is fixed to the C-layer base plate 534, and slides (elevates) together with the C-layer base plate 534. Will be done. Specifically, the C-layer decorative body 535 includes a plurality of insertion shafts 535a projecting from the back surface thereof, and fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 534c of the C-layer base plate 534 are fastened to the insertion shafts 535a. As a result, it is fixed to the front side of the C layer base plate 534.

The first coupling member 539 is a member for forming a decorative portion that is visible to the player from the front side and abutting against the pair of second coupling members 630 of the second coupling operation unit 600 to form a coupling state. Yes (see FIG. 32), a main body portion 539a formed in a vertically long rectangular plate shape in front view, and a guide groove 539b which is a groove-shaped opening extending linearly along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 539a. A decorative portion 539c connected below the main body portion 534a, and a rack portion 539d in which a plurality of teeth are engraved as rack gears along the guide groove 539b on the back surface side of the main body portion 532a are provided.

The lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 (decorative portion 539c) is formed by combining two flat surfaces that incline downward toward the center. That is, the front view shape of the first coupling member 539 (decorative portion 539c) is formed in an inverted V shape whose center protrudes in the downward direction (lower direction in FIG. 38) (see FIGS. 40 and 41). ). As described above, the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 (decorative portion 539c) is in contact with the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 at the coupling position (see FIG. 32).

Further, a concave portion 539e1 having a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view is recessed in the center of the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539. In the concave portion 539e1, the convex portion 630a1 projecting from the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 is housed (concave and convex fitting) at the coupling position. By this uneven fitting, the relative displacement (front-back direction and left-right direction) of the pair of second coupling members 630 with respect to the first coupling member 539 can be regulated at the coupling position.

In the C-layer base plate 534 and the first connecting member 539, a plurality of insertion shafts 533a of the B-layer decorative body 533 are inserted into the guide grooves 534b and 539b of the C-layer base plate 534 and the first connecting member 539, respectively. It is held so that it can be slidably displaced (elevated) between the B-layer decorative body 533 and the B-layer base plate 532, respectively.

In this case, the second pinion gear 538 pivotally supported by the insertion shaft 533a of the B-layer decorative body 533 is the rack portion 534d arranged on the front side of the C-layer base plate 534 (main body portion 534a) and the first coupling member. It is meshed with both the rack portion 539d arranged on the back side of the 539 (main body portion 539a), whereby a second set of double rack pinion structure is formed. Therefore, when the B-layer base plate 532 (and the B-layer decorative body 533) is slidably displaced (elevated) with respect to the A-layer base plate 531, the first coupling member is moved through the second set of double rack and pinion mechanisms. The 539 is slid relative to the B-layer base plate 532 (and the B-layer decorative body 533). That is, the first coupling member 539 is slid displacement (elevated) with respect to the substrate member 510 in a state where the speed is higher than that of the B layer base plate 532.

It will be described back from FIG. 33 to FIG. 35. As described above, the first coupling member 500 has a slide mechanism portion 530 arranged on the front side of the substrate member 510, and a plurality of the first coupling members 500 projecting from the back surface of the slide mechanism portion 530 (A layer base plate 531) (this embodiment). 6) insertion shafts 531c are inserted into the guide grooves 511 of the substrate member 510, respectively, and a collar C is applied to the insertion shafts 531c of a part (4) of the plurality of inserted insertion shafts 531c. While mounted as a retainer, the remaining (two) insertion shafts 531c are connected to the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 (see FIG. 35).

Here, also in the conventional gaming machine, a plurality of insertion shafts (corresponding to the insertion shaft 531c) are provided on the moving member (corresponding to the slide mechanism portion 530), and the plurality of insertion shafts are used as the substrate member (corresponding to the board member 510). ) Is inserted into the guide groove (corresponding to the guide groove 511), and the moving member is slidably displaced along the guide groove by the driving force of the driving means (corresponding to the driving unit 520).

In this case, in order to stably perform the slide displacement of the moving member, it is preferable to increase the number of insertion shafts to be inserted into the guide groove. On the other hand, if the number of insertion shafts is increased, the number of parts (corresponding to collar C) for holding the insertion shafts (preventing them from coming off from the guide groove) also increases, and the cost increases. Therefore, there has been a demand for a method of reducing costs while making it possible to stabilize the slide displacement of the moving member.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the first link member 541 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 522 to the slide mechanism portion 530 (A layer base plate 531) is provided on the front side where the slide mechanism portion 530 is arranged. The first link member 541 is arranged on the back side of the substrate member 510 on the opposite side of the substrate member 510, and is attached to the insertion shaft 531c of one of the plurality of insertion shafts 531c protruding from the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510. Since they are connected, one of the plurality of collars C for preventing the plurality of insertion shafts 531c from coming off from the guide groove 511 can also be used by the first link member 541. As a result, the number of the insertion shafts 531c is secured, and the slide displacement of the slide mechanism portion 530 (A layer base plate 531) can be stabilized, and the part (color C) for holding the insertion shaft 531c is maintained. It is possible to reduce the points and reduce the cost.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the second link member 542 is provided with the guide groove 511 with respect to the first link member 541 on the back surface side of the substrate member 510 which is opposite to the front side where the slide mechanism portion 530 is arranged. The second link member 542 is sandwiched and symmetrically arranged, and the second link member 542 is connected to the insertion shaft 531c of one of the plurality of insertion shafts 531c protruding from the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, so that the first link member Not only can the effect of making the supporting reaction force received by the slide mechanism portion 530 from the 541 and the second link member 542 symmetrical (stabilization of the slide displacement of the slide mechanism portion 530) can be achieved, but also among the plurality of colors C. Since the color C of 1 can also be used by the second link member 542, the number of insertion shafts 531c can be secured and the slide displacement of the slide mechanism portion 530 (A layer base plate 531) can be stabilized. However, it is possible to further reduce the cost by reducing the number of parts (color C) for holding the insertion shaft 531c.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 are arranged on the back surface side of the substrate member 510 to stabilize the slide displacement and reduce the cost. Further, in the present embodiment, the drive unit 520 is configured with the crank mechanism (crank gear 524, connecting rod 525 and connecting shaft 526), and the connecting groove 513 is formed in the substrate member 510 by opening the connecting groove 513. By connecting the connecting shaft 526 to the first link member 541, the drive unit 520 can be arranged on the front side of the substrate member 510. As a result, the components of the first coupling operation unit 500 can be concentrated on the front side of the substrate member 510, so that the limited space can be effectively utilized and the components can be efficiently arranged. As a result, the size of the first coupling operation unit 500 can be reduced.

In particular, in the first coupling operation unit 500, since the decorative portion 560 is arranged on the front surface side of the slide mechanism portion 530, the slide mechanism portion 530 and the decorative portion 560 are in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33B). The dimensions in the front-rear direction increase accordingly. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, the drive unit 520 can be arranged on the front surface side of the substrate member 510, so that the drive unit 520 is on the front surface side of the substrate member 510. It can be arranged in the dead space formed on the side of the slide mechanism portion 530. That is, two relatively large elements of the slide mechanism unit 530 and the drive unit 520 can be arranged side by side in the left-right direction. As a result, the dead space in the limited space can be effectively utilized, and the size of the first coupling operation unit 500 can be reduced particularly in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33B).

Further, in this case, according to the present embodiment, the first link member 541 is formed in a flat plate shape, and the first link member 541 is centered on the support shaft 527 on the back surface side of the substrate member 510. Since the structure is rotated, the space for the movement of the first link member 541 can be made flat. That is, a space for moving the first link member 541 can be secured by a flat space on the back side of the substrate member 510, and it is necessary to secure a large space in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33B). There is no. Therefore, from this point as well, the size of the first coupling operation unit 500 can be reduced particularly in the front-rear direction.

The same applies to the second link member 542. By using the connecting groove 514, the urging spring 571 is arranged on the front surface side of the substrate member 510, and the dead space described above is effectively utilized. The space for the movement of the second link member 542 can also be made flat, and as a result, the size of the first coupling operation unit 500 can be reduced particularly in the front-rear direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33B). it can.

Next, the operation of the first coupling operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. In this description, FIGS. 34 to 39 will be referred to as appropriate.

FIG. 40A is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 in a state where the first coupling member 539 is arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 40B is a front view of the first coupling member 539 arranged in the retracted position. It is a rear view of the 1st coupling operation unit 500 in the evacuated state. FIG. 41A is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 in a state where the first coupling member 539 is arranged at the coupling position, and FIG. 41B is a front view of the first coupling member 539 arranged at the coupling position. It is a rear view of the 1st coupling operation unit 500 in the said state. In addition, in FIGS. 40 and 41, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, the raising member 550 and the decorative portion 560 are not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b), in the state where the first coupling member 539 is in the retracted position, the drive unit 520 rotates the crank gear 524 in the arrow A1 direction via the connecting rod 525. The connecting shaft 526 is displaced in the direction of arrow B1 (see FIG. 36), and the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 raise the sliding holes 541c and 542c around the shaft support holes 541a and 542a. It is arranged in a posture rotated in the direction (upper in FIG. 40 (b)). Therefore, the A-layer base plate 531 (FIGS. 38 and 39) of the slide mechanism portion 530 is arranged on the upper end side (upper side of FIG. 40 (b)) of the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and the first coupling member 539 is raised. A state (with the retracted position placed) is formed.

In this case, as described above, the urging force of the urging spring 571 is applied to the second link member 542. The urging force of the urging spring 571 is such that the posture of the second link member 542 is rotated in the posture shown in FIG. 40B (that is, the posture in which the sliding hole 542c is raised about the shaft support hole 542a). ) Is acted on in the direction of holding. Therefore, the first coupling member 539 can be stably held at the retracted position shown in FIG. 40 (a). In particular, an external force (for example, an external force generated when the player hits or shakes the gaming machine) is applied to the first coupling member 539 which should be in the stopped state at the retracted position, and the first coupling member 539 is moved in the vertical direction. Even when vibration is generated, the urging force of the urging spring 571 can be used to quickly converge the vibration of the first coupling member 539 in the vertical direction.

From the state shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b), when the connecting shaft 526 is displaced in the direction of arrow B2 via the connecting rod 525 by the rotation of the crank gear 524 in the direction of arrow A2 in the drive unit 520. (See FIG. 36), the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 are rotated around the shaft support holes 541a and 542a in the direction of lowering the sliding holes 541c and 542c (downward in FIG. 40B). .. As a result, the A-layer base plate 531 of the slide mechanism portion 530 is lowered along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and as described above, the two sets of double rack and pinion mechanisms are operated (FIGS. 38 and 38). (See FIG. 39), the first coupling member 539 is lowered.

As shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 tend to lower the sliding holes 541c and 542c around the shaft support holes 541a and 542a. Further rotated, the A layer base plate 531 (insertion shaft 539c) of the slide mechanism portion 530 is arranged on the lower end side (lower side of FIG. 41B) of the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, so that the first coupling member A state in which the 539 is lowered (the coupling position is arranged) is formed.

From the state shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), in the drive unit 520, the connecting shaft 526 is displaced in the direction of the arrow B1 via the connecting rod 525 by the rotation of the crank gear 524 in the direction of the arrow A1. As a result (see FIG. 36), the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 move in the direction of raising the sliding holes 541c and 542c around the shaft support holes 541a and 542a (upper in FIG. 41B). It is rotated. As a result, the A-layer base plate 531 of the slide mechanism portion 530 is raised along the guide groove 511 of the substrate member 510, and as described above, the two sets of double rack and pinion mechanisms are operated (FIGS. 38 and 38 and). (See FIG. 39), the first coupling member 539 is raised. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b), the first connecting member 539 is arranged (returned) to the retracted position.

According to the present embodiment, the slide mechanism portion 530 has a structure in which the first coupling member 539 is slid and displaced in the vertical direction via two sets of double rack and pinion mechanisms. It can be speeded up. On the other hand, when raising the first coupling member 539 from the coupling position shown in FIG. 41 (a) to the retracted position in FIG. 40 (a), not only the first coupling member 539 but also the slide mechanism portion 530 and others are used. Since each of the constituent members of the above must also be raised against the action of gravity, the load on the drive motor 522 (see FIGS. 34 and 35) becomes large.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the urging force of the urging spring 571 makes the posture of the second link member 542 centered on the posture shown in FIG. 40 (b) (that is, the shaft support hole 542a as the center). The sliding hole 542c is acted in a direction of holding the sliding hole 542c in a posture rotated in a rising direction). Therefore, when the first coupling member 539 is raised from the coupling position shown in FIG. 41 (a) to the retracted position in FIG. 40 (a) against the action of gravity, the urging force of the urging spring 571 is assisted. Since it can be used as a force, the driving force required for the drive motor 522 of the drive unit 520 can be reduced accordingly, and the capacity thereof can be reduced.

Here, the substrate member 510 is arranged in a posture in which the extension direction of the guide groove 511 is slightly inclined with respect to the vertical direction (vertical direction of FIGS. 40 and 41). Specifically, the lower end side of the guide groove 511 is projected toward the front side (front side, front side of the paper surface in FIG. 40 (a)) of the substrate member 510 (the upper end side of the guide groove 511 is the back side side of the substrate member 510 (). It is arranged in a posture (retracted to the rear side, the back side of the paper surface in FIG. 40 (a)). As a result, the slide mechanism portion 530 arranged on the front side of the substrate member 510 is tilted forward due to its own weight (a posture in which the slide mechanism portion 530 is tilted in a direction away from the front surface of the base member 510 (front side)). Since this can be suppressed, the load on the color C can be reduced accordingly, and the durability thereof can be improved.

However, since the slide mechanism portion 530 is configured by superimposing each element thereof (for example, A layer base plate 531 and B layer base plate 532, C layer base plate 534, etc.), the slide mechanism portion 510 is configured with respect to the above-mentioned vertical direction of the substrate member 510. If the inclination is made too large, the elements of the slide mechanism portion 530 are likely to be brought into close contact with each other, and the sliding resistance at the time of the slide displacement becomes large. Therefore, the above-mentioned inclination cannot be made sufficiently large, and therefore, a relatively large load is applied to the color C.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the substrate member 510 is interposed between the slide mechanism portion 530 and the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 connected (connected) to the insertion shaft 531c of the slide mechanism portion 530. Therefore, the forward leaning posture of the slide mechanism portion 530 can be regulated not only by the collar C but also by the first link member 541 and the second link member 542. As a result, the load on the collar C can be suppressed to improve its durability, and the slide mechanism portion 530 can be slid displacement (elevated) in a stable state.

In particular, as described above, the plurality of insertion shafts 531c are located above the center in the longitudinal direction of the layer A base plate 531 (see FIG. 39). Therefore, when the slide mechanism portion 530 is in a forward leaning posture toward the front side of the substrate member 510 due to its own weight, the forward leaning posture is changed by the collar C, the first link member 541, and the second link member 542. It can be effectively regulated, and as a result, the slide mechanism portion 530 (A layer base plate 531) can be slid displacement (elevated) in a stable state.

Next, the second coupling operation unit 600 disposed below the first coupling operation unit 500 (see FIGS. 31 and 32) will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45.

FIG. 42 is a front perspective view of the second coupling operation unit 600. FIG. 43A is a front view of the second coupling operation unit 600, and FIG. 43B is a rear view of the second coupling operation unit 600. In FIG. 43A, the illustration of the front case body 612 is omitted. Further, in FIGS. 42 and 43, a state in which the pair of second coupling members 630 are retracted to the retracted position is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the second coupling operation unit 600 is pivotally supported by the back case body 611 and the front case body 612, and the back case body 611 and the front case body 612 on the proximal end side, respectively. Link means (inner link member 621 and outer link member 622), a second coupling member 630 rotatably supported on the tip side of each of the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622, and an inner link member 621. A drive motor 640 that generates a driving force for displacement of the outer link member 622, and a transmission means (pinion gear 651 and a transmission gear) for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 640 to the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622. 652) and is mainly provided.

In the present embodiment, a total pair of links, a second coupling member 630, a drive motor 640, and a transmission means is arranged on the left and right sides of the back case body 611 and the front case body 612. .. In this case, the set arranged on the left side of the back case body 611 and the front case body 612 and the set arranged on the right side are the width directions of the back case body 611 and the front case body 612 (left and right in FIG. 43A). Direction) Since the configurations are substantially the same except that they are formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the virtual line passing through the center and the shape of the decorative portion is different, they will be described with the same reference numerals.

The back case body 611 and the front case body 612 are members formed in a plate shape from a resin material, respectively, and are fastened and fixed facing each other at a predetermined interval, and link means (internal space) between the facing surfaces thereof (internal space). The inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622) and the transmission means (pinion gear 651 and transmission gear 652) are accommodated.

A pair of guide grooves 611a formed by being curved in an arc shape are formed in the back case body 611 as openings. The guide groove 611a is curved in an arc shape centered on the proximal shaft 621a, which will be described later (that is, is formed in a shape obtained by cutting out a part of the annular shape centered on the proximal shaft 621a), and the inner link member 621. A rotatably shaft-supported collar 621d is fitted on the back surface of the. The groove width of the guide groove 611a is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter dimension of the collar 621d. Therefore, as will be described later, when the inner link member 621 is rotated about the base end shaft 621a, the collar 621d is guided along the extending direction of the guide groove 611a, so that the inner link member 621 ( And the rotation of the outer link member 622) can be stabilized. As a result, the position accuracy of the second coupling member 630 at the coupling position can be improved.

The inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622 are rotatably supported on the back case body 611 and the front case body 612 via the base end shafts 621a and 622a on the base end side thereof, while the tip end side thereof is rotatably supported on the tip end shaft 621b, It is rotatably pivotally supported by the second coupling member 630 via 622b.

In this case, in the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622, the distance between the proximal shaft 621a and the proximal shaft 622a and the distance between the distal shaft 621b and the distal shaft 622b are equalized, and the proximal shaft 621a is equalized. And the distance between the tip shaft 621b and the distance between the proximal shaft 622a and the tip shaft 622b are made equal to form a parallel link mechanism. Therefore, when the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622 are rotated about the proximal shafts 621a and 622a, the second coupling member 630 does not have a rotation center and is parallel to each other (that is, shown in FIG. 43A). Moved (while maintaining the posture to do).

The second coupling member 630 is a member that forms a decorative portion that is visible to the player from the front side and is coupled to the first coupling member 539 at the coupling position (see FIG. 32), and is a lower surface of the first coupling member 539. An upper surface 630a to which the 539e abuts and an opposing surface 630b to which the other second coupling member 630 abuts when they are adjacent to each other are formed.

The upper surface 630a is formed as a flat surface that inclines downward toward the facing surface 630b in the front view of the second coupling member 630 shown in FIG. 43, and the facing surface 630b is formed as a flat surface parallel to the vertical direction. Will be done. Therefore, when the pair of second coupling members 630 are brought into contact with each other at the coupling position, the front view shape of the pair of second coupling members 630 on the upper surface 630a side is V-shaped with the center recessed. It is formed into a shape (see FIG. 44 (b)). As described above, the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 (decorative portion 539c) is brought into contact with each of the upper surface 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 (see FIG. 32).

Further, on the upper surface 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630, a convex portion 630a1 having a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view is projected on the facing surface 630b side, respectively. The convex portion 630a1 is housed (concave and convex fitted) in the concave portion 539e1 recessed in the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 at the coupling position. By this uneven fitting, as described above, the relative displacement (front-back direction and left-right direction) of the pair of second coupling members 630 with respect to the first coupling member 539 can be regulated at the coupling position. Here, the convex portion 630a1 is reduced in thickness toward the tip of the protrusion. Therefore, when the upper surface 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 is coupled (contacted) to the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539, the convex portion 630a1 can be easily inserted (internally fitted) into the concave portion 539e1. it can.

A gear portion 621c is integrally formed on the base end side of the inner link member 621. The gear portion 621c is a portion formed in a fan shape that projects outward in the radial direction about the base end shaft 621a, and a plurality of teeth are engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the fan shape. A transmission gear 652, which will be described later, is meshed with the gear portion 621c.

The drive motor 640 is arranged on the back side of the back case body 611, and the pinion gear 651 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 640 projecting to the front side of the back case body 611. A transmission gear 652 is meshed with the pinion gear 651, and a gear portion 621c of the inner link member 621 is meshed with the transmission gear 652 as described above.

Next, the operation of the second coupling operation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG. 44. In this description, FIG. 43A will be referred to as appropriate.

44 (a) and 44 (b) are front views of the second coupling operation unit 600, and the illustration of the front case body 612 is omitted. In FIG. 44 (a), the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged between the retracted position and the coupling position, and in FIG. 44 (b), the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged at the coupling position. Each of these states is illustrated.

At the retracted position shown in FIG. 43A, the left and right link mechanisms (inner link member 621 and outer link member 622) are tilted in directions separated from each other, and the pair of second coupling members 630 are separated from each other to the left and right. When the left and right drive motors 640 are rotationally driven from the state (retracted position) shown in FIG. 43A and the pinion gear 651 is rotated, the rotation is rotated via the transmission gear 652 and the gear portion 621c of the inner link member 621. The gear portion 621c is rotated around the base end shaft 621a. As a result, the left and right inner link members 621 are rotated about the proximal shaft 621a, respectively, and as shown in FIG. 44A, the left and right link mechanisms (inner link member 621 and outer link member 622) are close to each other. Stand up in the direction.

When the left and right drive motors 640 are further rotationally driven from the state shown in FIG. 44 (a), the left and right link mechanisms (inner link member 621 and outer link member 622) are close to each other as shown in FIG. 44 (b). A pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged at the coupling positions so as to be further erected in the direction of That is, the pair of second coupling members 630 are adjacent to each other on the left and right, and the facing surfaces 630b are brought into contact with each other. On the other hand, from the state shown in FIG. 44B, when the drive motor 640 is rotationally driven in the direction opposite to the above-mentioned case, the left and right link mechanisms (inner link member 621 and outer link member 622) are separated from each other. As shown in FIG. 43A, the pair of second coupling members 630 are retracted to the retracted position.

Returning to FIGS. 31 and 32, the coupling operation of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 will be described. In this description, FIG. 45 will be referred to as appropriate. FIG. 45 is a front view of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600 in a state where the first coupling member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged at the coupling positions.

As described above, the coupling of the first coupling member 539 of the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling member 630 of the second coupling operation unit 600 is performed from the state (retracted position) shown in FIG. 31 by a pair of second members. The coupling members 630 are arranged side by side on the left and right sides of each other by standing upright of the link mechanism, and the first coupling member 539 is lowered toward the pair of second coupling members 630 arranged next to each other on the left and right sides. As shown in 32, the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is brought into contact with the upper surface 630a of each of the pair of second coupling members 630.

Here, as shown in FIG. 45, in the first coupling operation unit 500 and the second coupling operation unit 600, the inclination angle of the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 and the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 with respect to the horizontal plane is an angle θ. It is said that. Therefore, when the first coupling member 539 is lowered (sliding displacement) along the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 45), it acts on the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 from the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539. The vertical force F is divided into a force component Fv (= F × cosθ) in the direction perpendicular to the lower surface 539e and the upper surface 630a and a force component Fp (= F × sinθ) in the direction parallel to the lower surface 539e and the upper surface 630a. Can be disassembled. Here, the force F is approximated as a concentrated load acting on the center of the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 in the width direction.

In this case, in the present embodiment, the angle θ of the lower surface 539e and the upper surface 630a with respect to the horizontal plane is set to be smaller than the angle α with respect to the vertical direction of the inner link member 621 and the outer link member 622. Further, in the present embodiment, when the action direction of the force component Fv is extended starting from the center of the upper surface 630a in the width direction, the extension line thereof is inside the base end shaft 622a of the outer link member 622 (inner link member 621). It is formed so as to pass through the base end shaft 621a side).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 45, at the coupling position, the pair of second coupling members 630 are arranged side by side on the left and right, and the direction substantially orthogonal to the adjacent direction of the pair of second coupling members 630 (vertical). The first coupling member 539 is lowered toward the second coupling member 630 from the direction (vertical direction in FIG. 45), and the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is brought into contact with each of the upper surfaces 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630. Then, it is possible to form a force in the direction in which the pair of second coupling members 630 are brought close to each other in the adjacent directions. As a result, not only the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 and the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630 can be coupled, but also the facing surfaces 630b of the pair of second coupling members 630 can be coupled to each other, and a plurality of members ( The effect of connecting the first coupling member 539 and the pair of second coupling members 630) can be ensured.

That is, even in a conventional gaming machine, a pair of members are provided so as to be movable, the pair of members are retracted to different retracted positions, and the pair is moved from the different retracted positions and arranged at the coupling position. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-115300). In this case, if the coupling is not properly performed, such as when a gap is formed between the pair of members at the coupling position, the effect of connecting the pair of members is impaired. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the pair of members have a symmetrical shape, it is relatively easy to connect the pair of members facing each other, but the three members are properly connected (that is, that is). , It was difficult to combine (while suppressing the occurrence of gaps).

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, as described above, when the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 comes into contact with each of the upper surface 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630 at the coupling position, a pair Since it is possible to form a force in the direction in which the second coupling member 630 is adjacent to each other, a gap is generated between the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 and the upper surface 630a of the second coupling member 630. Not only can this be suppressed, but the formation of a gap between the facing surfaces 630b of the pair of second coupling members 630 can be suppressed, and the respective members can be coupled to each other. That is, the three members can be properly connected to each other, and the effect of the combination can be ensured.

In this case, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 45, the pair of second coupling members 630 has a front view shape (in FIGS. 32 and 45) on the upper surface 630a side (upper side of FIGS. 32 and 45). The shape shown in the figure) has a concave shape in which the center is recessed downward (lower side in FIGS. 32 and 45), while the first coupling member 539 is viewed from the front on the lower surface 539e side (lower side in FIGS. 32 and 45). The shape (the shape shown in FIGS. 32 and 45) corresponds to the shape of the pair of second coupling members 630, and the center is a protruding shape protruding downward (downward in FIGS. 32 and 45).

Therefore, as described above, at the reference position, the first coupling member 539 is lowered toward the pair of second coupling members 630, and the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is the upper surface 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630. Upon contact with each, the first coupling member 539 enters between the pair of second coupling members 630 due to the concave and protruding shapes, and the first coupling member 539 is paired with the second coupling member 630. Reminds the player of a mode in which the two are spread in a direction away from each other (that is, a mode in which a gap is formed between the facing surfaces 630b).

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, at the coupling position, the lower surface 539e of the first coupling member 539 is brought into contact with each of the upper surface 630a of the pair of second coupling members 630, whereby the pair of second coupling members By forming a force in the direction in which the 630s are brought close to each other, the pair of second coupling members 630 can be coupled while suppressing the formation of a gap between the facing surfaces 630b. As a result, it can be operated in a mode different from the player's expectation, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Next, the annular operation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 57.

FIG. 46 is a front perspective view of the ring operating unit 700 in a state where the ring forming member 790 is arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 47 is a front perspective view of the ring operating unit 700 in a state where the ring forming member 790 is arranged in the connecting position. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit 700.

As shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the ring operation unit 700 includes a pair of ring forming members 790 that are moved up and down and rotated via the link member 770, and as described above, the opening 211a (third symbol display). It is disposed on the back case 210 at a position below the device 81 (see FIG. 2) and on the back side of the rotary operation unit 300 (see FIGS. 6 to 9). The ring operation unit 700 is moved up and down while rotating the pair of ring forming members 790, and is arranged at the retracted position shown in FIG. 46 or the coupling position shown in FIG. 47.

At the retracted position shown in FIG. 46, the pair of ring-forming members 790 are lowered while being separated from each other to the left and right, and the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is opened (FIG. 6). reference). On the other hand, at the coupling position shown in FIG. 47, the pair of ring-forming members 790 are rotated upward in a direction close to each other, and the pair of ring-forming members 790 are coupled to form a third symbol display device. An annular shape is formed on the front surface side of the 81 (see FIG. 10).

In this case, according to the ring operation unit 700, when the pair of ring forming members 790 are raised upward and arranged at the coupling position, the ring forming member 790 is mechanically moved to the joining position (raised position). As a result, the energy consumption of the drive motor 740 required to hold the pair of ring-forming members 790 at the coupling position can be suppressed.

FIG. 48 is an exploded front perspective view of the annular operation unit 700 with the disassembled annular operation unit 700 viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded view of the annular operation unit 700 with the disassembled annular operation unit 700 viewed from the rear. It is a rear perspective view.

As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the ring operation unit 700 includes an intermediate case body 710, a back case body 720 arranged on the back side of the intermediate case body 710, and a side opposite to the back case 720. The front case body 730 arranged on the front side of the intermediate case body 710, the drive motor 740 arranged in the intermediate case 710 and generating the rotational driving force, and the rotational driving force of the drive motor 740 are transmitted. Gear group (1st gear 751 to 6th gear 756), a rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gear 761 and a pair of racks 762) that converts the rotational motion transmitted through the gear group into linear motion, and the rack and pinion mechanism. A pair of link members 770 whose base ends are rotatably supported by a pair of racks 762 in a rack and pinion mechanism, an elevating base body 780 whose tips of the pair of link members 770 are axially supported, and an elevating base thereof. The body 780 is mainly provided with a pair of ring-forming members 790 whose base ends are rotatably supported by the shaft.

The intermediate case body 710 holds the gear group and the rack and pinion mechanism rotatably and slidably with the back case body 720 arranged on the back side, and the front case body arranged on the front side. A member that holds the base end of the link member 770 so that it can be slidably displaced between the link member and the 730. The main body portion 711 formed in a horizontally long rectangular flat plate shape in front view, and the insertion groove 712 formed with an opening in the main body portion 711. And an overhanging portion 713 that projects upward from the upper edge of the main body portion 711.

The insertion groove 712 is inserted with the insertion shafts 772 of the pair of link members 770 arranged on the front side of the intermediate case body 710 (main body 711), and the insertion shafts 772 of the pair of link members 770 inserted through the insertion grooves 712. It is a groove-shaped opening for inserting into the insertion holes 762c of the pair of racks 762 on the back side of the main body 711, and extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the main body 711. The width of the insertion groove 712 is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the insertion shaft 772 of the link member 770.

The overhanging portion 713 is a portion that abuts on the back surface of the link member 770 and suppresses the link member 770 from swinging in the front-rear direction (for example, the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 56), and is the center in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 711. The front view is formed in a substantially triangular shape (the width becomes wider) from the tip of the overhang toward the upper edge of the main body portion 711, and the front surface 713a thereof becomes the front surface 711a of the main body portion 711. It is formed so as to be flush with each other (smoothly connected with no step and parallel to each other).

Therefore, as will be described later, when the link member 770 is rotated (displaced) toward the upright state, the front surface 713a of the overhanging portion 713 comes into contact with the back surface of the link member 770 (FIGS. 47 and 56). (See), and when the link member 770 is in the upright state, the link member 770 can be sandwiched between the front surface 713a of the overhanging portion 713 and the pillar portion 732 of the case body 730 (see FIG. 47). .. As a result, the link member 770 can be brought into contact with the link member 770 in the standing state or in the vicinity thereof where the posture of the link member 770 tends to be particularly unstable, so that the swing of the link member 770 in the front-rear direction can be effectively suppressed.

The edge of the overhanging portion 713 is formed so as to be curved in an arc shape when viewed from the front. Therefore, as the link member 770 stands up (that is, as its posture tends to become unstable), the area of the front surface 713a of the overhanging portion 713 that can come into contact with the back surface of the link member 770 can be expanded. While the link member 770 can be effectively suppressed from swinging in the front-rear direction, the area where the overhanging portion 713 can be visually recognized from the front can be made smaller, and the appearance can be suppressed from being spoiled.

Further, in the overhanging portion 713, a head 713b formed at the tip in the overhanging direction (upper side of FIGS. 48 and 49) is projected forward (forward), and the head 713b is a front case body 730 described later. It is connected to the top of the pillar portion 732. Therefore, as will be described later, when the pair of link members 770 are erected upright, the head 713b of the overhanging portion 713 is interposed between the pair of link members 770 facing each other.

The rear case body 720 is a member that rotatably and slidably holds the gear group and the rack and pinion mechanism between the rear case body 720 and the intermediate case body 710. An insertion groove 722 formed in the main body 721, a tip guide groove 723 and a rear end guide groove 724 arranged in parallel with the insertion groove 722, and a gear group (second gear 725 to sixth gear 756). And a plurality of shafts 725 that rotatably support the pinion gear 761 and the pinion gear 761 are mainly provided.

The insertion groove 722 has an insertion shaft 772 of the link member 770 protruding from the back surface of the rack 762 (that is, an insertion shaft 772 inserted into the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762 via the insertion groove 712 of the intermediate case body 710). It is a groove-shaped opening for receiving, and extends linearly along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 721. That is, the insertion groove 722 is formed at a position where it overlaps with the insertion groove 712 of the intermediate case body 710 in the front view in the assembled state. The width of the insertion groove 722 is set to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the insertion shaft 772 of the link member 770.

The tip guide groove 723 and the rear end guide groove 724 are groove-shaped openings for inserting the tip guide piece 762a and the rear end guide shaft 762b of the rack 762 and restricting the moving direction thereof, and are formed with the insertion groove 722. It is arranged in parallel with the insertion groove 722 with a predetermined interval between them. The groove width of the tip guide groove 723 is set to be smaller than the groove width of the rear end guide groove 724, and the rear end guide shaft 762b of the rack 762 is formed in the tip guide groove 723 so as not to be inserted. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress an assembly defect when assembling the rack 762 to the rear case body 720, and it is possible to improve the workability of the assembling work.

The front case body 730 is a member that holds a pair of link members 770 to and from the intermediate case body 710 so as to be slidable, and has a main body portion 731 formed in a horizontally long rectangular flat plate shape in front view and a main body portion 731 thereof. It is mainly provided with a columnar pillar portion 732 which is arranged in front of the above and extends along the vertical direction.

The back surface 731a of the main body portion 731 is formed as a flat surface parallel to the front surface 711a of the main body portion 711 and the front surface 713a of the overhanging portion 713 in the intermediate case body 710, and the link member 770 is tilted as described later. When rotated (displaced) with respect to the front and back of the link member 770, the back 731a of the main body 731, the front 711a of the main body 711, and the front 713a of the overhanging part 713 are brought into contact with each other. Make a contact. As a result, the link member 770 can be rotated (displaced) between the tilted state and the upright state while effectively suppressing the swing of the link member 770 in the front-rear direction (for example, the vertical direction of the paper surface in FIG. 54). it can.

The pillar portion 732 is a portion for holding the guide rod 733 inside and sandwiching the link member 770 with the overhanging portion 713 of the intermediate case body 710, and the front surface (front side on the left side of FIG. 48) is opened. It is formed in a box shape. The guide rod 733 is a member for guiding the elevating and lowering of the elevating base body 780, and is formed as a rod-shaped body having a circular cross section from a metal material. Be retained. In this way, the pillar portion 732 is formed in a box shape with an open front surface, and the guide rod 733 is stored inside the pillar portion 732, so that the guide rod 733 is arranged by utilizing the dead space. This makes it possible to reduce the size of the ring operation unit 700 as a whole.

As will be described later, the guide rod 733 is inserted into the guided portion 784 of the elevating base body 780, and the moving direction of the elevating base body 780 is set in the vertical direction (of the guide rod 733) via the guided portion 784. Guide in the axial direction). In this case, the guide rod 733 is arranged in front of the tooth surface of the rack 762 (front side) and behind the elevating base body 780 (main body portion 781), and is therefore arranged as described later. It is possible to achieve both the effect of arranging the elevating base body 780 offset to the front side with respect to the rack 762 and ensuring the smooth elevating operation of the elevating base body 780.

The drive motor 740 is arranged on the front side of the intermediate case body 710, and its drive shaft is projected to the back side of the intermediate case body 710 (main body portion 711). A first gear 751 is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 740, and the second gear 752 to the sixth gear 756 are pivotally supported on the first gear 751 by a plurality of shafts 725 of the rear case body 720. Are meshed with each other in order, and a pinion gear 761 pivotally supported on the shaft 725 of the rear case body 720 is meshed with the sixth gear 756.

As described above, the rack and pinion mechanism is composed of a pinion gear 761 and a pair of racks 762. The pinion gear 761 is rotatably supported by a shaft 725 of the rear case body 720, and the pinion gear 761 is sandwiched between the rack and pinion mechanism. Racks 762 are arranged so as to face each other with their tooth surfaces facing each other.

The rack 762 is provided with a tip guide piece 762a and a rear end guide shaft 762b at one end and the other end in the longitudinal direction, respectively, and an insertion hole 762c is formed through the side of the rear end guide shaft 762b. .. The front end guide piece 762a is formed as a rectangular parallelepiped-shaped protrusion, and the rear end guide shaft 762b is formed as a shaft body having a circular cross section. As described above, the tip guide piece 762a and the rear end guide shaft 762b are inserted into the tip guide groove 723 and the rear end guide groove 724 of the rear case body 720, so that the slide displacement (linear motion) of the rack 762 is caused. The direction is restricted to the extension direction of both guide grooves 723 and 724.

The pair of link members 770 are members for forming a link mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 740 transmitted via the rack and pinion mechanism to the elevating base body 780 and the ring forming member 790, and are members in the longitudinal direction. One side (base end) is connected to the rack 762, and the other side (tip) in the longitudinal direction is connected to the elevating base body 780 and the ring forming member 790. Here, the detailed configuration of the link member 770 will be described with reference to FIG.

50 (a) is a front perspective view of the link member 770, FIG. 50 (b) is a rear perspective view of the link member 770, and FIG. 50 (c) is a partial Lc of FIG. 50 (a). It is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the link member 770, and FIG. 50 (d) is a side view of the link member 770 in the direction of arrow Ld of FIG. 50 (a).

The link member 770 has a long plate-shaped main body portion 771, an insertion shaft 772 projecting from the back surface of the main body portion 771 on one side (base end) in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 771, and the insertion shaft 772 thereof. A protruding wall portion 773 projecting from the front of the main body 771 on the other side (tip) of the main body 771 on the opposite side in the longitudinal direction, and a gear portion disposed at the protruding tip of the protruding wall 773. It is equipped with 774.

As described above, the insertion shaft 772 is a shaft body having a circular cross section that is inserted into the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762 via the insertion shaft 712 of the intermediate case body 710. The protruding wall portion 773 is a portion for offsetting the arrangement position of the gear portion 774 toward the front (front) side of the main body portion 771, and is projected from the front of the main body portion 771 at a protrusion height h. The gear portion 774 includes a shaft support hole 774a formed through the center and a plurality of teeth 774b engraved on the outer periphery around the shaft support hole 774, and the shaft of the elevating base body 780 is provided in the shaft support hole 774a. The 782 is inserted (shafted) and is meshed with the gear portion 792 (tooth 792b) of the ring-forming member 790 via the tooth 774b.

In the present embodiment, the gear portion 774 (tooth 774b) is formed as a spur gear whose tooth streak direction is parallel to the axial direction, and the tooth 774b of the gear portion 774 extends over the entire wall surface of the projecting wall portion 774. Will be engraved. Therefore, even when the gear portion 774 is displaced relative to the gear portion 792 of the ring-forming member 790 to be meshed due to the deflection or twist of the link member 770 (main body portion 771) (FIGS. 48 and FIG. 49), the teeth 774b extending and engraved on the wall surface of the projecting wall portion 774 can be meshed with the gear portion 792 (teeth 792b) of the ring forming member 790, and these gears can be fitted accordingly. It is possible to prevent the teeth of the portion 774 and the gear portion 792 from being disengaged. Further, even when the relative displacement due to the above-mentioned deflection or twist occurs and the gear portions 774 and 792 are relatively displaced in the axial direction, the teeth extended and engraved on the wall surface of the projecting wall portion 774. Since the meshing area between the gear portion 774 (tooth 774b) and the gear portion 792 (tooth 792b) can be secured by the amount of 774b, uneven wear of each of these teeth 774b and 772b is suppressed and the durability thereof is improved. Can be planned.

Here, for example, if the main body portion 771 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outward in the radial direction) of the gear portion 774, it is easy to secure the area of the seat surface on the axial end surface of the gear portion 774. However, in the present embodiment, since the protruding wall portion 773 is connected to the back surface (axial end surface) of the gear portion 774, the portion of the protruding wall portion 773 can be secured on the axial end surface of the gear portion 774. The area of the seating surface is reduced.

In this case, in the protruding wall portion 773, the wall surface on the side opposite to the wall surface on which the teeth 774b of the gear portion 774 are extended and engraved (the wall surface on the axial center side of the shaft support hole 774a) is the shaft support hole 774. Since it is formed as a concave curved surface curved in an arc shape centered on the axis, the shaft of the gear portion 774 even when the projecting wall portion 773 is connected to the back surface (axial end face) of the gear portion 774. The area of the seating surface can be secured on the directional end surface, and the diameter of the collar C (see FIG. 49) arranged on the axial end surface of the gear portion 774 can be increased accordingly. Further, when the link member 770 (main body portion 771, the protruding wall portion 773 and the gear portion 774) is integrally molded from the resin material, the protruding wall portion 773 is on the side opposite to the wall surface on which the teeth 774b are formed. By forming the wall surface as a concave curved surface, it is possible to make the wall thickness as a whole including not only the projecting wall portion 773 but also the main body portion 771 and the gear portion 774 uniform, and it is possible to improve the moldability thereof.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the protruding wall portion 773 is engraved with teeth 774b over the entire surface thereof (that is, up to the portion connected to the front surface of the main body portion 771), so that a region in which the teeth 774b are formed is sufficient. It is possible to more reliably prevent the ring-forming member 790 from being disengaged from the gear portion 792 (see FIGS. 48 and 49). Further, as described above, when the link member 770 (main body portion 771, the protruding wall portion 773 and the gear portion 774) is integrally molded from the resin material, the teeth 774b are extended only to the middle of the protruding wall portion 773. In each case, the wall thickness of the projecting wall portion 773 can be made uniform over the entire area, and the moldability thereof can be further improved.

As described above, in the link member 770, the protruding wall portion 773 is projected from the front surface of the main body portion 771 at the protruding height h, and the gear portion 774 is arranged at the protruding tip of the protruding wall portion 773. Since it can be installed, the gear portion 774 can be separated from the main body portion 771 by the amount of the protrusion height h of the protrusion wall portion 773. That is, in the assembled state, the arrangement position of the elevating base body 780 can be separated (offset) from the rack 762 to the front (front) by the protrusion height h of the protrusion wall portion 773 (FIG. 55). And FIG. 57). The action of such offset will be described later.

It will be described back to FIG. 48 and FIG. 49. The elevating base body 780 is a member that is moved up and down between the retracted position and the coupling position by the driving force of the drive motor 740 transmitted via the link member 770, and is the main body 780 and the back surface of the main body 780. A pair of shafts 782 that support the gear portion 774 (shaft support hole 774a) of the link member 770, and a gear portion 792 (shaft support) of the ring-forming member 790 that is juxtaposed below the pair of shafts 782. A pair of shafts 783 that pivotally support the holes 792a) and a pair of shafts 783 are arranged below the pair of shafts 783 on the back surface of the main body portion 781 and guided in the vertical direction by a pillar portion 732 (guide rod 733) of the front case body 730. A guided portion 784 to be guided and a cover body 785 arranged on the back surface of the main body portion 781 are mainly provided.

A plurality of insertion holes through which the guide rod 733 can be inserted are formed in the guided portion 784, and the guide rod 733 is inserted through the insertion holes so that the moving direction of the elevating base body 780 is the axial direction of the guide rod 733. It is regulated only in the direction along.

The cover body 785 is a member arranged so as to face the axial end faces of the gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790 (see FIG. 51), and has a substantially trapezoidal head in front view. A portion 785a and an extension portion 785b extending downward from the lower edge of the head in a band shape and having a width narrower than that of the head 785a are provided, and these are integrally formed from a thin metal plate. .. As will be described later, when relative displacement occurs in the gear portions 774 and 792, the cover body 785 (head 785a and extension portion 785b) is brought into contact with the axial end faces of the gear portions 774 and 792. Therefore, the relative displacement can be suppressed, and the meshing state of the gears 774 and the meshing state of the gears 774 can be properly maintained.

The gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790 were inserted into the shaft support holes 774a and 792a of the gear portions 774 and 792, respectively, with the shafts 782 and 783 inserted therein. By fastening and fixing the fastening screw while interposing a collar C having a diameter larger than that of the shaft support holes 774a and 792a at the tip of the shafts 782 and 783, the shafts are rotatably supported by the shafts 782 and 783. To.

The pair of ring-forming members 790 are members for rotationally driving by the driving force of the drive motor 740 transmitted via the link member 770 and forming a ring shape at the coupling position, and the ring shape is abbreviated. It mainly includes a main body portion 791 formed in a shape divided into two, and a gear portion 792 arranged on one side (base end) in the circumferential direction of the main body portion 791. The gear portion 792 is a portion that is pivotally supported by the elevating base body 780 and is meshed with the gear portion 774 of the link member 770. It is provided with a plurality of teeth 792b engraved on the outer periphery thereof.

A magnet (not shown) is embedded in the other side (tip) of the main body 791 on the side opposite to the side where the gear portion 792 is arranged in the circumferential direction to form an annular shape at the coupling position. (See FIG. 47), the tips of the ring-forming members 790 can be brought into close contact with each other by using the magnetic force of the magnet. As a result, the ring shape can be reliably formed by the pair of ring forming members 790.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the connection state of the link member 770, the elevating base body 780, and the ring forming member 790 will be described. FIG. 51 is a partially enlarged rear view of the ring operation unit 700. Note that FIG. 51 shows a state in which the elevating base body 780 is arranged between the retracted position and the coupling position, and corresponds to the state of FIG. 54, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 51, in the elevating base body 780, the tips (gear portions 774) of the pair of link members 770 are pivotally supported by the pair of shafts 782 (see FIG. 49), and the pair of shafts 783 (see FIG. 49). (See 49), the base ends (gear portions 792) of the pair of ring-forming members 790 are pivotally supported, and the gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the annulus-forming member 790 are meshed with each other.

Therefore, as will be described later, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 740 is transmitted to the pair of link members 770 via the rack and pinion mechanism, and the pair of link members 770 causes the gear portion 774 (shaft 782, see FIG. 49). It is rotated with respect to the elevating base body 780 as a center, and the rotation is transmitted to the annulus forming member 790 via the teeth of the gear portions 774 and 792, so that the annulus forming member 790 is moved to the gear portion 792 (shaft). 783, see FIG. 49) is rotated with respect to the gear portion elevating base body 780. At the same time, the pair of link members 770 are raised or tilted with respect to the case bodies 710, 720, 730, so that the elevating base body 780 is moved up and down with respect to the case bodies 710, 720, 730 (FIG. 52). See FIG. 57).

Here, the elevating base body 780 is connected to the tip of the link member 770 formed in the shape of a long plate, and the elevating operation is performed with respect to the case bodies 710, 720, and 730 via the link member 770. Occasionally, the link member 770 (main body 771) is likely to vibrate or sway in the front-rear direction (vertical direction on the paper in FIG. 51) due to bending or twisting of the elevating base body 780. Further, the ring-forming member 790 is also formed in the shape of a long plate, and the tip opposite to the base end connected to the elevating base body 780 is a free end. It is easy to generate vibration and shaking with respect to the elevating base body 780. In particular, in the present embodiment, since the magnet is embedded in the tip of the ring-forming member 790, the weight of the tip is increased, and the ring-forming member 790 is more likely to generate vibration or shaking.

Such vibration or shaking of the elevating base body 780 in the front-rear direction causes a relative displacement between the link member 770 and the elevating base body 780. That is, it causes a relative displacement between the gear portion 774 integrally formed with the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790. Similarly, vibration or sway of the ring-forming member 790 with respect to the elevating base body 780 causes a relative displacement between the gear portion 792 integrally formed with the ring-forming member 790 and the gear portion 774 of the link member 770. .. Therefore, the meshing state of the gear portions 774 and 792 becomes unstable, and not only the rotational operation of the ring forming member 790 and the elevating operation of the elevating base body 780 are not properly performed due to the poor transmission of the driving force, but also the gear portion 774. , 792 wear is promoted, leading to a decrease in durability.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the cover body 785 is arranged on the back surface of the elevating base body 780, and the cover body 785 is used as the axial end surface of the gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790. It is arranged so as to face each other. As a result, the link member 770 (main body 771) is bent or twisted to cause vibration or sway in the elevating base body 780 or the ring-forming member 790, and even if relative displacement is attempted between the gears 774 and 790. By bringing the cover body 785 (head 785a and extension 785b) into contact with the axial end faces of the gears 774 and 790, the relative displacement between the gears 774 and 792 is suppressed, and the meshing thereof is suppressed. The state can be maintained properly. As a result, poor transmission of the driving force can be suppressed, the rotational operation of the annulus forming member 790 and the elevating operation of the elevating base body 780 can be appropriately performed, and the wear of the gear portions 774 and 792 can be suppressed. Durability can be improved.

In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, the head portion 785a of the cover body 785 is arranged above the gear portion 774 of the link member 770, and the extension portion 785b of the cover body 785 is the link member 770. It is arranged between the gear portions 774 and between the gear portions 792 of the ring forming member 790. Therefore, of the axial end faces of the gear portions 774 and 792, the side opposite to the main body portion 771 of the link member 770 and the main body portion 791 of the ring forming member 790 with the shaft 782 and the shaft 783 (see FIG. 49) interposed therebetween. The head portion 785a and the extension portion 785b of the cover body 785 are brought into contact with the axial end faces, and the relative displacements of the gear portions 774 and 792 can be effectively regulated.

For example, when the link member 770 is in an upright state or is in a state close to an upright state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 51), the shaft 782 (see FIG. 49) is sandwiched between the main body portion 771 of the link member 770. Since the head 785a of the cover member 785 is arranged on the opposite side, the head 785a of the cover body 785 effectively displaces the gear portion 774 due to the deflection and twist of the main body 771 of the link member 770. Can be regulated. Similarly, for example, when the link member 770 is in the tilted state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 52) or is in a state close to the tilted state, the shaft 782 (see FIG. 49) with respect to the main body portion 771 of the link member 770. ) Is arranged on the opposite side of the cover member 785, so that the displacement of the gear portion 774 due to the bending or twisting of the main body portion 771 of the link member 770 can be measured by the extension portion of the cover body 785. It can be effectively regulated by 785b.

On the other hand, the ring-forming member 790 is left and right (left and right in FIG. 51) of the gear portion 792 regardless of its rotational position (that is, whether the link member 770 is in the upright state or the tilted state). Since the main body portion 791 of the ring-forming member 790 is arranged in the ring-forming member 790, the extension portion of the cover member 785 is located on the opposite side of the main body portion 792 of the ring-forming member 790 with the shaft 783 (see FIG. 49) interposed therebetween. By arranging the 785b, the displacement of the gear portion 792 due to the bending and twisting of the main body portion 791 of the ring forming member 790 can be effectively regulated by the extending portion 785b of the cover body 785.

In the present embodiment, each gear portion 774 of the pair of link members 770 is not only meshed with the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790 located below the pair of link members 770, but also the gear portions 774 adjacent to each other on the left and right sides. Is also toothed. Similarly, each gear portion 792 of the pair of ring-forming members 790 is not only meshed with each gear portion 774 of the link member 770 located above the pair of ring forming members 790, but also tooth portions of the gear portions 792 adjacent to the left and right are meshed with each other. Will be done.

As a result, it is possible to improve the synchronization accuracy of the rotational operation of the pair of ring-forming members 790. That is, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 740 is transmitted to the pair of link members 770 via the rack and pinion mechanism, and further transmitted from the pair of link members 770 to the pair of ring-forming members 790 (FIG. FIG. 48 and FIG. 49). In this case, the pair of racks 762 of the rack and pinion mechanism are independent of each other with respect to the pinion gear 761. Therefore, when the pair of rack members 770 and the pair of ring-forming members 790 are also independent of each other, the amount of phase shift (for example, backlash amount and dimensional tolerance) of the rack 762 with respect to the pinion gear 761 is the pair of racks 762. The phase shift amount of the link member 770 with respect to the rack 762 (for example, the amount of rattling of the insertion shaft 772 with respect to the insertion hole 762c) differs between the pair of link members 770, and further, the ring-forming member with respect to the link member 770. The amount of phase shift of 790 (for example, the amount of rattling of the shafts 782 and 783 with respect to the shaft support holes 774a and 792a, or the amount of rattling of the teeth 792b with respect to the teeth 774b) differs between the pair of ring-forming members 790. By accumulating the phase shifts of the above, a phase shift occurs in the rotational operation of the pair of ring forming members 790, and the synchronization accuracy is lowered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the gear portions 774 of the pair of link members 770 are meshed with each other, and the gear portions 792 of the pair of ring forming members 790 are meshed with each other. Even if it occurs in the transmission path of the above, the phase shift does not appear in the rotational operation of the ring forming member 790 (that is, the phase shift can be absorbed at the most downstream of the driving force transmission path). As a result, it is possible to improve the synchronization accuracy in the rotational operation of the ring forming member 790.

Next, the operation of the annular operation unit 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 57. In this description, FIGS. 46 to 51 will be referred to as appropriate.

FIG. 52 is a schematic rear view of the annulus operation unit 700 schematically showing the annulus operation unit 700 in which the pair of annulus forming members 790 are arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 53 is a schematic rear view of the annulus operation unit 700. FIG. It is sectional drawing of the ring operation unit 700 in line LIII. FIG. 54 is a schematic rear view of the annulus operation unit 700 schematically showing the annulus operation unit 700 in which the pair of annulus forming members 790 are arranged at a position intermediate between the retracted position and the coupling position. 55 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the ring operation unit 700 in the LV-LV line of FIG. 54. FIG. 56 is a schematic rear view of the annulus operation unit 700 schematically showing the annulus operation unit 700 in which the pair of annulus forming members 790 are arranged at the coupling positions, and FIG. 57 is a schematic rear view of the annulus operation unit 700. It is sectional drawing of the ring operation unit 700 in LVII line.

In addition, in FIGS. 52 to 57, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, an outer shell structure including an intermediate case body 510, a rear case body 520, and a front case body 530, a drive motor 740, and a gear group (No. 1). The drive structure including the 1st gear 751 to the 6th gear 756) or the cover body 785 is not shown. However, in FIGS. 52, 54 and 56, the positions of the upper edges of the intermediate case body 710 in the main body portion 711 and the overhanging portions 713 (front 711a, 713a) and the main body portion 731 (rear surface 731a) of the front case body 730. ) Is schematically shown using a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, in a state where the pair of ring-forming members 790 are arranged in the retracted position, the pair of racks 762 are deployed in a direction in which they are separated from each other, and the tip side (tip guide piece 762a) thereof. The tooth surface on the side) is meshed with the pinion gear 761. Therefore, the pair of link members 770 whose base end side (insertion shaft 772) is pivotally supported by the rear end side (insertion hole 762c) of the pair of racks 762 are in an tilted state, and the pair of link members 770 The elevating base body 780 on which the tip side (gear portion 774) is pivotally supported is arranged at the lowermost position. Further, the pair of ring-forming members 790 are deployed (distributed to the left and right) in a direction away from each other.

When the drive motor 540 is driven from this state (a state in which the pair of ring-forming members 790 are arranged in the retracted position) and the rotational driving force thereof is transmitted to the pinion gear 761 via the gear group (FIGS. 48 and 49). (See), the pinion gear 761 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 52, and as the pinion gear 761 rotates, the pair of racks 762 shorten their deployment length (the insertion holes 762c on the rear end side are close to each other). It is linearly moved in the direction of making it. As a result, the pair of link members 770 are gradually erected by being displaced toward the center (that is, toward the direction in which they are close to each other) on the proximal end side (insertion shaft 772).

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, a relative rotation of the pair of link members 770 with respect to the elevating base body 780 is formed, and the rotation is caused by the gear portions 774 and 792 of the pair of ring forming members. By transmitting to the 790, the pair of ring-forming members 790 are rotated relative to the elevating base body 780, and the tips of the pair of ring members 790 are brought close to each other. At the same time, the standing operation of the pair of link members 770 forms a relative displacement of the elevating base body 790 with respect to the rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gear 761 and rack 762), and the elevating base 790 is raised.

As described above, in the ring operation unit 700, the elevating base body 780 is pivotally supported at the tip of the pair of link members 770 whose base ends are pivotally supported by the rack and pinion mechanism, and the pair of link members 770 stand up or tilt. By engaging the gear portion 792 of the ring-forming member 790 whose base end is pivotally supported by the elevating base body 780 with the gear portion 774 of the link member 770, the elevating base body 780 can be raised and lowered. The ring-forming member 790 can be rotated by the relative rotation of the link member 770 with respect to the elevating base body 780.

That is, the means for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 740 to the elevating base body 790 (means for raising and lowering) and the means for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 740 to the ring forming member 790 (means for rotating) are individually provided. Since it is not necessary to provide the link member 770, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced accordingly. Further, the rotational movement of the annulus forming member 790 and the linear motion in the vertical direction can be performed in parallel, that is, the annulus is not formed at a fixed position but is changed in the vertical direction. Since the annulus is formed in order, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the gear portion 774 of the link member 770 and the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790 are meshed with each other, and the link member 770 is fitted through the meshing of these gears 774 and 792. In this case, for example, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, as the standing of the pair of link members 770 progresses, the position of the center of gravity becomes higher, so that the link Due to the bending and twisting of the member 770 (main body 771), the elevating base body 780 (and the pair of ring-forming members 790) vibrates and sways in the front-rear direction (vertical direction on the paper surface in FIG. 54 and left-right direction in FIG. 55). It becomes easier (the amount of displacement in the front-back direction increases).

The bending or twisting of the link member 770 (main body 771) or the ring-forming member 790 (main body 791) or the vibration or sway in the front-rear direction was integrally formed with the link member 770 and the ring-forming member 790. By affecting the gear portions 774 and 792 and relatively displacement the gear portions 774 and 792, there is a possibility that the teeth of the gear portions 774792 may come off. Even if it is possible to prevent the gears 774 and 792 from coming off, the tooth dent state (dental area) becomes unstable and the surface pressure concentrates on a part of the tooth surface, so that the tooth 774b , 792b may be unevenly worn and the durability may be lowered.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the link member 770 is engraved with the teeth 774b extending on the wall surface of the projecting wall portion 773 connecting the main body portion 771 and the gear portion 774 (see FIG. 50). ), Even when the relative displacement of the gear portions 774 and 792 described above occurs, it is possible to easily maintain the tooth engagement between the gear portions 774 and 792 by the extension of 774b. As a result, not only the disengagement of the teeth can be suppressed, but also the state of the teeth can be stabilized, the uneven wear of the teeth 774b and 792b can be suppressed, and the durability thereof can be improved.

In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the pair of ring-forming members 790 are arranged at a position intermediate between the retracted position and the coupling position (specifically, the rack 762 with respect to the pinion gear 761). The rack is arranged at an intermediate position in the relative movable range), and when the standing angle of the pair of link members 770 reaches a predetermined angle, the teeth 774b of the gear portion 774 and the teeth engraved on the protruding wall portion 773. The tooth 774b connected to the 774b (see FIG. 50) starts meshing with the tooth 792b in the gear portion 792 of the ring forming member 790.

Therefore, the range from the state shown in FIGS. 54 and 55 to the state shown in FIGS. 56 and 57 described later (that is, the elevating base body 790 vibrates in the front-rear direction due to the large standing angle of the link member 770). In the range where vibration is likely to occur and the teeth of the gears 774 and 792 are most likely to come off), the teeth 774b extending and engraved on the wall surface of the projecting wall portion 773 can be effectively utilized. As a result, it is possible to effectively suppress the disengagement of the gears 774 and 792 or improve the durability of the teeth 774b and 792b.

From the state shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the pinion gear 761 is further rotated clockwise in FIG. 52 by driving the drive motor 740, and the pair of racks 762 is further shortened in its unfolded length (rear end). When the side insertion holes 762c are linearly moved in the direction in which they are brought close to each other), the pair of link members 770 are erected substantially vertically. That is, the direction connecting the shaft 782 of the elevating base body 780 (see FIG. 49) and the insertion shaft 782 of the link member 770 is substantially vertical. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the pair of ring-forming members 790 are arranged at the coupling positions, and the tips of the pair of ring-forming members 790 are brought into contact with each other to form a ring shape. It is formed.

In this case, when the pair of ring-forming members 790 are arranged at the coupling positions (that is, when the pair of link members 770 are erected to the upright state (posture along the vertical direction)), these pair of link members A connecting portion between the pillar portion 732 of the front case body 730 and the overhanging portion 713 of the intermediate case body 710 between the facing surfaces of the 770 (see the head 713b of the overhanging portion 713, FIGS. 48 and 49 in this embodiment). Is interposed, and the left and right side surfaces of the connecting portion (head 713b of the overhanging portion 713) are in contact with the facing surfaces of the pair of link members 770 (see FIG. 56). The posture of the elevating base body 780 that supports the ring-forming member 790 and the pair of ring-forming members 790 can be stabilized at the coupling position.

That is, at the coupling position, the pair of link members 770 are in an upright position, and the center of gravity is raised, so that the pair of link members 770 rotate left and right (in the left-right direction in FIG. 56) about the insertion shaft 772. At the same time, the rack 762 is easily moved in the direction of its linear motion (horizontal direction in FIG. 56) in response to the left-right rotation of the pair of link members 770. Therefore, it becomes difficult to maintain the postures of the link member 770 and the rack 762, and as a result, the postures of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring-forming members 790 arranged at the tip of the link member 770 also become unstable.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, a connecting portion (overhanging portion) between the front case body 730 (pillar portion 732) and the intermediate case body 710 (overhanging portion 713) is provided between the opposing surfaces of the pair of link members 770. Since the head 713b) of the 713 is interposed, the connecting portion (head 713b) rotates the pair of link members 770 in the left-right direction around the insertion shaft 772 and in the direction of the linear motion of the rack 762. Movement can be regulated. As a result, the pair of link members 770 can be maintained in an upright state, and the postures of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 can be stabilized at the coupling position.

Further, since the pair of the link members 770 are arranged so as to face each other substantially symmetrically in the left-right direction (the left-right direction of FIGS. 52, 54 and 56), the link members 770 are tilted relatively downward (for example, from FIG. 52). In (up to 55), the pair of link members 770 are arranged to face each other so that the pair of link members 770 try to rotate left and right (in the left-right direction of FIGS. 52 and 54) about the insertion shaft 772. The 770s can cancel each other out and maintain their posture.

On the other hand, the link member 770 may be formed in a flat plate shape, and it is difficult to maintain its posture with respect to the displacement in the front-rear direction (for example, the vertical direction of the paper surface in FIG. 54). In this case, in the present embodiment, the base end side (insertion shaft 772 side) of the link member 770 is sandwiched between the intermediate case body 710 and the front case body 730 facing surfaces. That is, when the link member 770 is rotated (displaced) between the tilted state and the upright state, the front case body 730 (main body portion 731) with respect to the front and back surfaces of the link member 770 on the proximal end side. The back surface 731a and the front surface 711a of the intermediate case body 710 (main body portion 711) can be brought into contact with each other. As a result, the link member 770 is stably rotated (displaced) between the tilted state and the upright state while effectively suppressing the swing of the link member 770 in the front-rear direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 54). Can be done. As a result, the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring-forming members 790 can be elevated and lowered while stabilizing their postures.

In particular, in the present embodiment, an overhanging portion 713 is formed so as to project upward in the central portion in the width direction of the intermediate case body 710 (main body portion 711) (see FIGS. 48 and 49), and the overhanging portion 713 is formed. , As shown in FIG. 56, the position of the upper edge of the front surface 713a is raised (that is, it abuts on the back surface of the link member 770) as it approaches the central portion in the width direction (that is, as the link member 770 is erected). The possible area is increased).

In this way, instead of raising the position of the upper edge of the front surface 711a of the intermediate case body 710 (main body portion 711) as a whole, the position of the upper edge is raised by partially raising only the central portion. The closer the link member 770 is to the upright state, the more the overhanging portion 713 is suppressed, while suppressing the appearance from being spoiled by the wall surface of the intermediate case body 710 (or the arrangement area of the third symbol display device 81 is reduced). The contactable area between the front surface 713a and the back surface of the link member 770 can be widened to enhance the effect of maintaining the posture of the link member 770 (suppressing the swing in the front-rear direction). As a result, the link member 770 can be stably rotated (displaced) in the vicinity of the upright state while suppressing the appearance from being spoiled. That is, the postures of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring-forming members 790 can be stably held in the stopped state at the coupling position, and the postures of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring-forming members 790 in the vicinity of the coupling position. Can be raised and lowered while stabilizing.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, the overhanging portion 713 of the intermediate case body 710 has its front surface 713a retracted to the retracted position (that is, tilted to the lowermost position) as a pair of link members. The shape is set so that it can come into contact with the back surface of the 770 (see FIG. 46). As a result, the postures of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring-forming members 790 are stably held in the stopped state at the coupling position, and the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring-forming members 790 are located in the vicinity of the coupling position. The elevating base 780 and the elevating base 780 arranged at the retracted position (lowermost) by using the portion (overhanging portion 713) where the height position of the upper edge is raised for the purpose of ascending and descending while stabilizing the posture of the body. At the same time, the effect of stably maintaining the posture of the pair of ring-forming members 790 in the stopped state can be obtained.

From the state shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, when the drive motor 740 is rotationally driven in the direction opposite to the above case, the pinion gear 761 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 56, and the pinion gear 761 is rotated. Along with the rotation, a pair of racks 762 are deployed (that is, linearly moved in a direction in which the insertion holes 762c on the rear end side are separated from each other). As a result, the pair of link members 770 are gradually tilted, and as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the pair of ring-forming members 790 are retracted to the retracted position.

Here, in the ring operation member 700, the weights of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 act on the rack and pinion mechanism (pinion gear 761 and the pair of racks 762) via the pair of link members 770. Will be done. That is, the weights of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring-forming members 790 are acted on in the direction of deploying the pair of racks 762 via the pair of link members 770. Therefore, the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring-forming members 790 may be lowered from the coupling position. In this case, the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring-forming members 790 are opposed to the driving force of the drive motor 740 to regulate the descent of the elevating base body 780 (that is, the elevating base body 780 is combined). In the structure (held in position), the energy consumption required for the drive motor 740 increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the projecting wall portion 773 is interposed between the main body portion 771 and the gear portion 774 of the link member 770, and the projecting height of the projecting wall portion 773 is provided. The gear portion 774 is offset from the main body portion 711 to the front (front) side by the amount of h (see FIG. 50 (d)). Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 55 and 57, the elevating base body 780 is in a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack 762 and orthogonal to the moving direction of the rack 762 (that is, the paper surfaces of FIGS. 54 and 56). On the front side, on the left side of FIGS. 55 and 57), the thickness dimension of the link member 770 (that is, the total dimension of the thickness dimension of the main body portion 771 and the gear portion 774 and the protrusion height h of the protrusion wall portion 773). It is offset (separated) from the rack 762 by the amount.

As a result, the weights of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring-forming members 790 are also acted on the rack 762 via the link member 770 in the offset direction described above. That is, as a force component acting on the rack 762 from the link member 770, a force component in the direction in which the elevating base body 780 is offset can be generated, and a force component that moves the rack 762 in the moving direction by that amount can be generated. Can be made smaller. As a result, the energy consumption required for the drive motor 740 can be suppressed.

In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, at the coupling position, the link member 770 is erected in a posture along the vertical direction, and the shaft 782 (see FIG. 49) of the elevating base body 780 and the link member 770 are inserted. The direction connecting the shaft 772 is substantially orthogonal to the tooth surface of the rack 762. Therefore, when the weights of the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring-forming members 790 act on the rack 762 via the link member 770, the rack 762 acts as a force component acting on the rack 762 from the link member 770. It is possible to suppress the generation of a force component in the direction in which the link member 770 is tilted (that is, the direction in which the link member 770 in the standing state is tilted). As a result, even if the driving force of the drive motor 740 is released, the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring-forming members 790 can be held at the coupling position, and as a result, the energy consumption required for the drive motor 740 is consumed. Can be suppressed.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the distance T1 between the pair of shafts 782 of the elevating base body 780 in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 56) is the insertion shaft of the pair of link members 770. It is made smaller than the horizontal distance T2 between 772 (T1 <T2). As a result, the pair of link members 770 are erected in a posture slightly inclined with respect to the vertical direction (that is, a posture in which the pair of link members 770 are in a V shape). In this way, by keeping the pair of link members 770 in a C-shaped posture, the drive motor 740 is described above in order to start the operation from the state (coupling position) shown in FIG. 56 to the retracted position. When the rotation drive is performed in the opposite direction to the case, the deployment of the pair of racks 762 (that is, the tilting of the pair of link members 770) due to the rotation drive can be easily and surely started.

In particular, in the present embodiment, a magnet is embedded in the tip of the main body 791 of the ring-forming member 790, and the tips of the main body 791 are magnetically attached to each other. Therefore, even if the driving force of the drive motor 740 is released. , The elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members 790 can be easily held at the coupling position. On the other hand, when starting the operation from the coupling position to the retracted position, it is necessary to release the magnetic force of the magnet. In this case, keeping the pair of link members 770 in a V-shaped posture (that is, setting T1 <T2) keeps the coupling state at the coupling position and starts the operation from the coupling position to the retracted position. It is particularly effective in terms of achieving both the release of the combined state of time and the certainty of both.

Here, the magnet embedded in the tip of the main body portion 791 of the ring forming member 790 may be omitted. In this case, the distance T1 in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 56) between the pair of shafts 782 of the elevating base body 780 and the distance T2 in the horizontal direction between the insertion shafts 772 of the pair of link members 770 are abbreviated. It is preferable that they are the same (T1 = T2) or that the former is larger than the latter (T2 <T1). As a result, even when the driving force of the drive motor 740 is released, the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring-forming members 790 can be easily held at the coupling position.

In the present embodiment, the guide rod 733 is arranged on the front side (left side in FIG. 57) of the tooth surface of the rack 762 and on the back side (right side in FIG. 57) of the elevating base body 780 (main body portion 781). Will be done. Further, the guided portion 784 of the elevating base body 780 through which the guide rod 733 is inserted is arranged at the lowermost position of the elevating base body 780 (main body portion 781). That is, in the direction of offset forward of the elevating base body 780 with respect to the rack 762, the portion where the insertion shaft 772 of the link member 770 is inserted into the insertion hole 762c of the rack 762, the elevating base body 780 and the pair of ring forming members. A guide rod 733 is arranged at a position between the position of the center of gravity of the structure made of 790, and the elevating base body 780 is guided up and down via the guide rod 733 and the guided portion 784. With such an arrangement, it is possible to achieve both the effect of arranging the elevating base body 780 offset to the front side with respect to the rack 762 described above and ensuring the smooth elevating operation of the elevating base body 780.

Next, the swing operation unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 64.

The swinging operation unit 800 includes two arm members 820 as described above (see FIGS. 7 and 11), and is composed of two units for operating (displaceting) both arm members 820. That is, the swinging operation unit 800 is composed of two units that are above the inside of the rear case 210 and are arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 211a in the front view of the rear case 210. In this case, the structure (technical idea) for operating (displacement) the arm member 820 is the same in the two units, and therefore, in the following, one of the two units (on the left side of the opening 211a). The disposed unit (see FIGS. 7 and 11) will be referred to as a swinging operation unit 800.

FIG. 58 is a front perspective view of the swinging operation unit 800 in a state where the arm member 820 is retracted to the retracted position, and FIG. 59 is a swinging operating unit in a state where the arm member 820 is extended to the overhanging position. It is a front perspective view of 800.

As shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the swing operation unit 800 includes an arm member 820 whose base end is rotatably supported, and a drive motor 830 that applies a rotational driving force to the arm member 820. The arm member 820 is swung (rotated) between the retracted position shown in FIG. 58 and the overhanging position shown in FIG. 59. At the retracted position, the arm member 820 is in a posture of hanging vertically downward and retracted to the back side of the composite operation unit 400, so that it cannot be seen by the player (see FIG. 6). At the protruding position, the arm member 820 is in a posture in which the tip thereof is lifted upward and tilted diagonally downward, and the tip thereof is projected to the front of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 5).

In this case, in the present embodiment, when the arm member 820 is arranged at the overhanging position shown in FIG. 59, the arm member 820 can be mechanically held at the overhanging position as described later. Therefore, it is not necessary to oppose the driving force of the drive motor 830 so that the arm member 820 does not rotate toward the retracted position due to the action of gravity (its own weight), and the arm member 820 is moved to the overhanging position by that amount. The energy consumption of the drive motor 830 required for holding can be suppressed. This detailed configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64.

FIG. 60 is an exploded front perspective view of the rocking operation unit 800 when the disassembled rocking operation unit 800 is viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 61A is a rear view of the swinging operation unit 800 in a state where the arm member 820 is arranged in the retracted position, and FIG. 61B is a swinging motion in the partial LXIb of FIG. 61A. It is a partially enlarged rear view of the operation unit 800. In addition, in FIG. 61A and FIG. 61B, the rocking operation unit 800 with the mounting base 810 removed is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the swing operation unit 800 is pivotally supported by a mounting base 810 arranged on a rear case 210 (see FIG. 7) and a base end rotatably supported by the mounting base 810. An arm member 820, a drive motor 830 that generates a driving force for rotationally driving the arm member 820, and a front case body 840 that is arranged in front of the mounting base 810 as well as the drive motor 830. , Is mainly provided.

The mounting base 810 is a member for accommodating the base end of the arm member 820 and the drive motor 830 between the mounting base 810 and the front case body 840, and is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The mounting base 810 is provided so as to project from the front surface thereof and also includes a shaft 811 for rotatably supporting the arm member 820.

The arm member 820 has a main body portion 821 formed in a long shape, a groove portion 822 formed as a groove-shaped opening on the base end side of the main body portion 821, and a main body portion 821 on the side opposite to the groove portion 822. The decorative portion 823, which is covered on the front surface on the tip side of the above and is formed as a decorative body, and the shaft support hole 824, which is formed through the main body portion 821 at a position between the decorative portion 823 and the groove portion 821, are formed. Mainly configured for preparation.

The groove portion 822 is composed of a first groove 822a extending linearly and a second groove 822b connected to one end of the first groove 822a and curved in an arc shape to extend, and both grooves 822a, It is formed as an L-shaped groove when viewed from the front from 822b. In other words, in the groove portion 822, the recess formed in one of the inner wall surfaces of the first groove 822a facing each other is the second groove 822b.

The arc shape of the second groove 822b is such that the protrusion pin 833 is arranged at the end point of the first groove 822a (the connection position between the first groove 822a and the second groove 822b) (see FIG. 63 (b)). Matches the arc shape centered on the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830. Further, the groove widths of the first groove 822a and the second groove 822b are set to have the same dimensions as each other. The arm member 820 has a shaft support hole 824 of which the shaft 811 of the mounting base 810 is inserted so that the base end thereof is inserted. Is rotatably supported with respect to the mounting base 810. In this case, the contact surface portion 841 of the front case body 840 is brought into contact with the arm member 820 on the front surface of the main body portion 821 and in the vicinity of the shaft support hole 824 (FIG. 61 (b)). reference). As a result, the arm member 820 is held in a state in which its base end is rotatable between the mounting base 810 and the front case body 840 facing each other.

The drive motor 830 has a plate-shaped drive arm 832 whose base end is fixed to the drive shaft 831 and extends radially outward from the drive shaft 831, and a protrusion projected from the tip of the drive arm 832. It is mainly provided with a setting pin 833, and is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the front case body 840 with a fastening screw in a state where the protruding pin 833 is inserted into the groove portion 822 of the arm member 820.

As described above, the projecting pin 833 is a portion to be inserted into the groove portion 822 of the arm member 820, and has an outer portion equal to or slightly smaller than the groove width of the groove portion 822 (first groove 822a and second groove 822b) of the arm member 820. It is formed as a columnar body with a diameter. Therefore, when the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 is rotationally driven, the projecting pin 833 is moved in the groove portion 822 of the arm member 820 along the extending direction of the groove portion 822, and as a result, the arm member 820 is driven. Is rotated about the axis 811.

Next, the swing operation of the swing operation unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64. In this description, FIG. 61 will be referred to as appropriate.

62 to 64 are views for explaining the process of operating the arm member 820 of the swinging operation unit 800 from the retracted position to the overhanging position in chronological order, with FIGS. 62 (a) and 63 (a). 64 (a) is a rear view of the rocking operation unit 800, and FIGS. 62 (b), 63 (b) and 64 (b) are partial LXIIb and FIG. 63 (a) of FIG. 62 (a), respectively. It is a partially enlarged rear view of the swing operation unit 800 in the partial LXIIIb of FIG. 64 (a) and the partial LXIVb of FIG. 64 (a).

Note that FIG. 62 shows a state in which the drive motor 830 is rotationally driven and the arm member 820 is swung by a predetermined amount from the retracted position to the overhanging position. FIG. 64 shows a state immediately after the arrival, in which the arm member 820 reaches the overhanging position and the drive motor is further rotationally driven.

As shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b), in the state where the arm member 820 is arranged in the retracted position, the arm member 820 is in a downwardly suspended posture, and the projecting pin 833 has a protruding pin 833. It is located at the starting point of the groove portion 822 in the first groove 822a (the end on the side opposite to the side connected to the second groove 822b, on the right side in FIG. 61B).

In this retracted position, the protruding tip surface of the protruding portion 821a projecting from the side surface of the main body portion 821 of the arm member 820 faces the regulation surface 812 on the side wall of the mounting base 810 at a predetermined interval. Therefore, when the arm member 820 is rotated around the shaft 811 in response to an external force (for example, an external force generated when the player hits or shakes the gaming machine), the protrusion 821a hits the regulation surface 812. The rotation of the arm member 820 can be regulated by being brought into contact with the arm member 820, and the rotation can be quickly converged.

The drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 is rotationally driven from the state shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b) (the state in which the arm member 820 is arranged in the retracted position), and the drive arm 832 is left in FIG. 61 (b). When rotated counterclockwise, the projecting pin 833 is moved toward the end point of the groove 822 in the first groove 822a (the side connected to the second groove 822b, the left side in FIG. 61B). ..

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (b), the arm member 820 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 61 (b) around the shaft support hole 824. As a result of the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 being further rotationally driven and the drive arm 832 being further rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 62 (b), the projecting pin 833 is the end point of the groove portion 822 at the first groove 822a. When it reaches, the arm member 820 is arranged at the overhanging position as shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b).

Here, also in the conventional gaming machine, a driving force is applied to the first axis (corresponding to the shaft 811), the moving member rotated around the first axis (corresponding to the arm member 820), and the moving member. A drive motor (corresponding to a drive motor 830) is provided, and the moving member is rotated around the first axis by the driving force of the drive means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-12640). In this case, when the moving member is arranged in the ascending position (corresponding to the overhanging position), it is necessary to prevent the moving member from moving (descending) due to the action of gravity. In this case, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the movement (lowering) of the moving member is regulated (that is, the moving member is held in the ascending position) by making the driving force of the driving motor oppose gravity (weight of the moving member). Because of the structure, the energy consumption required to hold the moving member is high.

On the other hand, according to the swinging operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the arm member 820 can be extended by mechanically holding the arm member 820 at the overhanging position so that the driving force of the drive motor 830 can be released. The energy consumption required to hold the position can be suppressed.

That is, according to the present embodiment, the state shown in FIGS. 63 (a) and 63 (b) (the projecting pin 833 reaches the end point of the first groove 822a of the groove portion 822, and the arm member 820 is arranged at the overhanging position. In the state immediately after the operation), the drive motor 830 is further rotationally driven. As a result, the drive arm 832 is further rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 62 (b), so that the projecting pin 833 has a groove portion 822 as shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b). Form a moved (accepted) state within the second groove 822b of the.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the second groove 822b is connected to the end point of the first groove 822a (a recess is recessed in one of the inner wall surfaces of the first groove 822a facing each other). In the state where the arm member 820 is arranged in the overhanging position, the projecting pin 833 is moved into the second groove 822b (on the inner wall surface of one of the inner wall surfaces of the first groove 822a facing each other). Since the state (where the projecting pin 833 is accepted) is formed in the recessed recess, the arm member 820 is mechanically held in the overhanging position (the arm member 820 is centered on the shaft support hole 824 (shaft 811)). It can be regulated to be rotated). That is, even if the driving force of the drive motor 830 is released, the arm member 820 can be mechanically held in the overhanging position, and the drive motor 830 required to hold the arm member 820 in the overhanging position is consumed by that amount. Energy can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the states shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), the protrusion pin 833 and the shaft support hole 824 (shaft 811) are connected in the direction connecting the drive shaft 831 and the protrusion pin 833. ) Is approximately orthogonal to each other, and the inner wall surfaces of the second groove 822b of the portion where the protrusion pin 833 is located are substantially orthogonal to the direction connecting the drive shaft 831 and the protrusion pin 833. Is formed as follows.

Therefore, when the arm member 820 is rotated around the shaft support hole 824 (shaft 811), the inner wall surface of the second groove 822b is directed in a direction that coincides with the direction connecting the drive shaft 831 and the projecting pin 833. Since the protrusion pin 833 is pressed, the arm member 820 is rotated, and even if the protrusion pin 833 is pressed by the inner wall surface of the second groove 822b, the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830 cannot be rotated. That is, the arm member 820 cannot be rotated.

Therefore, in a state where the driving force of the drive motor 830 is released, even if the arm member 820 is shaken by, for example, a player hitting or shaking the gaming machine, the arm member 820 still has a shaft support hole. Rotation around the 824 (shaft 811) can be restricted, and as a result, it can be reliably held in the overhang position.

In this case, as described above, in the arc shape of the second groove 822b, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the projecting pin 833 has the end point of the first groove 822a (the first groove 822a and the second groove 822b). In the state of being arranged at the connection position), it matches the arc shape centered on the drive shaft 831 of the drive motor 830. Therefore, when the protrusion pin 833 arranged at the end point of the first groove 822b is moved (accepted) into the second groove 822b (that is, when transitioning from the state shown in FIG. 63 to the state shown in FIG. 64). Since the movement locus of the projecting pin 833 and the shape of the inner wall surface of the second groove 822b match, it is possible to avoid the posture of the arm member 820 arranged at the overhanging position from fluctuating. it can.

That is, as shown in FIG. 63, after the arm member 820 is arranged at the overhanging position, the posture of the arm member 820 at the overhanging position is suppressed from fluctuating (while maintaining the stopped state). The projecting pin 833 can be moved (accepted) into the second groove 822b to mechanically hold the arm member 820 in the overhanging position.

Here, the groove portion 822 has a shape (of the first groove 822a) in which the second groove 822b extends from the end point of the first groove portion 822a toward the side opposite to the shaft support hole 824 (the side separated from the shaft support hole 824). Even if the inner wall surface of the inner wall surfaces facing each other has a concave portion on the inner wall surface opposite to the shaft support hole 824), the arm member 820 can be mechanically held as in the case of the present embodiment. It is possible. However, in this case, after the arm member 820 is arranged at the overhanging position, it is necessary to switch the rotation direction of the drive motor 830 when moving (accepting) the projecting pin 833 into the second groove 822b. This occurs, the control becomes complicated, and the reliability of the operation decreases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the groove portion 822 has a shape in which the second groove 822b extends from the end point of the first groove portion 822a toward the shaft support hole 824 side (the side close to the shaft support hole 824) (the first). 1 Groove 822a has a shape in which a recess is recessed in the inner wall surface on the shaft support hole 824 side of the inner wall surfaces facing each other), so that the arm member 820 is retracted without switching the rotation direction of the drive motor 830. The recessed pin 833 can be moved (accepted) into the second groove 822b to mechanically hold the arm member 820 at the overhanging position. As a result, control can be simplified and the reliability of operation can be improved.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In the above embodiment, in the combined operation unit 400, the case where the positioning holes 451e and 462e of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotary second gear 462 are formed through the main body portions 451a and 462a as through holes has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. The positioning holes 451e and 462e of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotary second gear 462 may be used as bottomed recesses. Even when a bottomed recess is used, the mounting position and the like can be positioned by inserting a jig into the recess by the same method as in the above embodiment, but compared with the case where the recess is formed as a through hole. As a result, the rigidity of the opening / closing first gear 451 and the rotating second gear 462 can be ensured, so that the durability thereof can be improved.

In the above embodiment, in the composite operation unit 400, by making the lengths of the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 different, the opening and closing operations of the operation members 491 and 492 are made non-parallel opening and closing, and the effect is produced. However, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the opening and closing operations of the operating members 491 and 492 are opened and closed in a non-parallel manner by making the lengths of the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 the same. Of course, it is possible.

In the above embodiment, in the composite operation unit 400, the gear ratio between the gear portion 482c and the rack portion 481b of the first pinion leg member 482 and the gear between the gear portion 483c and the rack portion 481b of the second pinion leg member 483. Although the case where the ratio is the same has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the gear ratio between the gear portion 482c and the rack portion 481b of the first pinion leg member 482 and the gear of the second pinion leg member 483 are described. The gear ratio between the portion 483c and the rack portion 481b may be a different gear ratio. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the operating members 491 and 492 can be made non-parallel opening / closing, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the above embodiment, in the composite operation unit 400, the case where both the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 are toothed with the rack portion 481b has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Only one of the first pinion leg member 482 and the second pinion leg member 483 can be meshed with the rack portion 481b, and the other can be rotated to the back arm body 471 and the front arm body 472 without being meshed with the rack portion 481b. It may only be supported by the shaft. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the operating members 491 and 492 can be made non-parallel opening / closing, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the above embodiment, in the composite operation unit 400, as the opening / closing operation and the rotating operation of the operating members 491 and 492, the operation of continuously rotating the rotation first gear 461 and the opening / closing first gear 451 from the rotation angle θ0 to the rotation angle θ4. However, the unit is not necessarily limited to this, and it is naturally possible to divide the unit of operation within the range of the rotation angle θ0 to θ4.

In the above embodiment, in the first coupling operation unit 500, a case where three insertion shafts 531c are arranged side by side in two rows on the back surface of the A layer base plate 531 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. , The number of insertion shafts 531c in each row may be 2 or less, or 4 or more.

In the above embodiment, in the first coupling operation unit 500, the first link member 541 and the second link member 542 are attached to the central insertion shaft 531c of the three insertion shafts 531c arranged vertically on the back surface of the A layer base plate 531. However, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the first link member 541 and the first link member 541 and the first link member 541 and the first link member 541 and the first link member 541c to the upper insertion shaft 531c or the lower insertion shaft 531c of the three insertion shafts 531c arranged one above the other Two link members 542 may be connected.

In the above embodiment, in the first coupling operation unit 500, a retaining ring E is provided as a retaining ring for the support shaft 527 and the insertion shaft 531c inserted into the shaft support hole 541a and the sliding hole 541c of the first link member 541. Although the case where the mounting ring E as a retaining ring or the fastening of the fastening screw is omitted for the connecting shaft 526 inserted into the connecting hole 541b while fastening the mounting or fastening screw has been described, this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the retaining ring E is attached or the fastening screw is fastened as a retaining ring at at least one of these three places.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device for displaying the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) is caused. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

The moving member formed so as to be movable between the first position and the second position, the driving means for generating the driving force for moving the moving member, and the driving force generated by the driving means are the moving members. In a gaming machine provided with a transmission means for transmitting to, the transmission means transmits a transmission state for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the moving member and transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the moving member. It is possible to form a blocking state to shut off, and when at least the moving member in the first position starts moving to the second position, the transmission state is formed after the blocking state is formed. A game machine A1 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine A1, when the moving member in the first position starts moving to the second position, the transmitting state is formed after the blocking state is formed by the transmitting means, so that the moving member The driving force required for the driving means to start the movement can be suppressed, and as a result, the driving means can be miniaturized.

That is, when the moving member in the first position starts moving to the second position, the stationary object is moved, so that a force exceeding the inertial force generated in the moving member at the start of the movement is applied. It is necessary to act on such a moving member, and the driving force required for the driving means becomes large. As a result, the size of the driving means has been increased (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-12640). On the other hand, after the movement of the moving member is started, the action of inertia that tries to maintain the moving state of the moving member acts, so that the driving force required for the driving means causes the moving member to move. It is smaller than the driving force required to get started. In other words, after the movement of the moving member is started, it can be said that a driving means having an unnecessarily large maximum output is being used.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine A1, when the moving member in the first position starts moving to the second position, the transmission state is formed after the blocking state is formed by the transmission means, so that the pachinko machine A1 is driven. Even if the driving force that can be generated by the means is small, the movement of the moving member can be started. That is, by forming the cutoff state first by the transmission means, it is possible to generate a driving force in the driving means in a no-load state, and it is possible to give momentum (inertial force) to the driving state of the driving means. .. After that, the transmission state is formed by the transmission means (switching from the cutoff state to the transmission state), so that the driving means has a driving force to the moving means in a state where the driving state has momentum (a state where the inertial force is large). Can be transmitted. As a result, the moving member can be started to move even if the driving means is miniaturized. In other words, it is possible to suppress the state in which a driving means having an unnecessarily large maximum output is used after the movement of the moving member is started.

In the gaming machine A1, the transmission means is formed so as to be able to mesh with a drive means side member in which teeth for which driving force is transmitted from the drive means are formed at least partially or all around, and a drive means side member thereof. A moving member side member having teeth formed at least partially or all around the teeth for transmitting the driving force transmitted from the driving means side member to the moving member, and at least the driving means side member or the moving member side member. One is a gaming machine A2 characterized in that the teeth are non-formed and include a non-formed portion that cannot be meshed with the other of the driving means side member or the moving member side member.

According to the gaming machine A2, in the transmission means, the drive means side member and the moving member side member are formed so as to be meshable with each other. Therefore, when the drive means side member is rotated by the drive force of the drive means, the drive means side member thereof. The moving member side member meshed with the member is rotated, and the driving force is transmitted to the moving member (a transmission state is formed) through the rotation of the moving member side member. In this case, since a non-formed portion in which teeth are not formed is formed on one of the drive means side member and the moving member side member, the drive means side member is rotated by the drive force of the drive means, and the drive means side member is rotated. When the non-forming portion is arranged at the meshing position of the member and the moving member side member, the driving means side member and the moving member side member cannot be meshed with each other, and the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the moving member is blocked. (A cutoff state is formed).

Therefore, when the moving member in the first position starts to move to the second position, the driving means side member can be idled by first forming a blocking state by using the non-forming portion. Therefore, the driving means can be driven in a no-load state, and the driving state of the driving means can have momentum (inertial force in the driving means side member). After that, by engaging the idling drive means side member with the moving member side member (that is, forming a transmission state), the drive means starts driving the moving means in a state where the driving state has momentum. be able to. As a result, the moving member can be started to move even if the driving means is miniaturized.

As described above, according to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the transmission means is composed of a driving means side member and a moving member side member, and is attached to at least one of the driving means side member or the moving member side member. Since the non-formed portion where the teeth are non-formed is provided, the blocking state and the transmission state are provided according to the relative rotation position (rotation position of the non-forming portion) between the drive means side member and the moving member side member. And can be switched. That is, since the configuration for achieving such switching of states does not require an actuator device and can be configured only with gears, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

Here, the teeth formed on the drive means side member and the moving member side member are mechanical elements used for power transmission through the teeth of the other party. In this case, the shape of the tooth streak is not limited. For example, the teeth of the gear illustrated below can be applied to the teeth of the drive means side member and the moving member side member. Examples of gears include spur gears, helical gears, bevel gears, bevel gears, bevel gears, screw gears, crown gears, miter gears, internal gears, hypoid gears, and worm gears. The same applies to the concepts of various inventions shown below.

In the gaming machine A2, each of the drive means side member and the moving member side member includes the non-formed portion, and the non-formed portion of the drive means side member and the non-formed portion of the moving member side member face each other. A gaming machine A3 characterized in that a cut-off state is formed.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, each of the driving means side member and the moving member side member is provided with a non-forming portion, and the non-forming portion of the driving means side member and the non-forming portion of the moving member side member are not formed. Since the forming portions face each other to form a blocking state, the outer diameters of the non-forming portions of the driving means side member and the moving member side member are secured, and the rigidity of the driving means side member and the moving member side member is increased. It can be improved.

That is, when only one of the drive means side member or the moving member side member has a non-formed portion (that is, teeth are formed on the other side of the drive means side member or the moving member side member over the entire circumference in the circumferential direction). It is necessary that the non-forming portion is retracted to a position where the tooth engagement with the other tooth of the driving means side member or the moving member side member can be avoided. Specifically, the non-forming portion needs to be retracted toward the rotation axis side from the valley bottom in one tooth of the drive means side member or the moving member side member. As a result, the amount of retreat in the non-formed portion is large, so that the outer diameter of one of the drive means side member or the moving member side member is small, and one of the drive means side member or the moving member side member is correspondingly small. It causes a decrease in the rigidity of.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A3, since each of the driving means side member and the moving member side member has a non-forming portion, both of the non-forming portions recede to a position where they do not interfere with the facing non-forming portion. It's enough if you have it. Specifically, both non-forming portions can be positioned between the valley bottom and the peak of the teeth of the drive means side member and the moving member side member, and it is not necessary to retract the portion toward the rotation shaft side from the valley bottom. As a result, the amount of retreat in the non-formed portion can be reduced, so that the outer diameters of the non-formed portions of the drive means side member and the moving member side member are secured, and the rigidity of the drive means side member and the moving member side member is increased. It can be improved.

In the gaming machine A3, the non-formed portion in one of the driving means side member or the moving member side member is formed so as to be curved in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of one of the driving means side member or the moving member side member. The non-forming portion on the other side of the drive means side member or the moving member side member is separated from the other tooth of the drive means side member or the moving member side member in the circumferential direction, and the drive means side member or the moving member side member. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that it has a shape that projects toward a non-forming portion on one side.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, the non-forming portion included in each of the driving means side member and the moving member side member is a non-forming portion in one of the driving means side member and the moving member side member. The non-formed portion of the drive means side member or the moving member side member is formed by being curved in an arc shape centered on one rotation axis of the drive means side member or the moving member side member, and the non-forming portion of the other of the driving means side member or the moving member side member is the driving means side member or the moving A shape that projects toward a non-formed portion formed on one of the drive means side member or the moving member side member as the member side member is separated from the other tooth in the circumferential direction (that is, the drive means side member or the moving member side member). Since the shape is such that the distance from the other rotation axis is large), the drive means side member or the moving member side member can be formed while avoiding interference between these two non-forming portions and forming a cutoff state. The outer diameter of the other non-formed portion can be increased to further increase the rigidity of the other of the drive means side member or the moving member side member.

In the game machine A3 or A4, the driving means side member and the moving member side member are the driving means at each of the first phase position and the second phase position which is a phase position different from the first phase position. The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the blocked state is formed by the non-formed portion of the side member and the non-formed portion of the moving member side member facing each other.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3 or A4, the drive means side member and the moving member side member form a cutoff state at two positions, the first phase position and the second phase position. Therefore, by making the first phase position and the second phase position correspond to the first position and the second position of the moving member, the movement of the moving member in the first position to the second position is started. Not only when the moving member is moved to the first position, but also when the moving member at the second position is started to move to the first position, the transmission state is formed after the cutoff state is formed, so that the driving state of the driving means is changed. It can have momentum (inertial force). That is, even if the driving force that can be generated by the driving means is small, the moving member can be started to move in both the case where the moving member is in the first position and the case where the moving member is in the second position.

A game including a moving member formed movably, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving force to the moving member. In the machine, the moving member includes a first moving member and a second moving member, and the transmitting means has a transmission state in which the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the second moving member, and the driving means from the driving means. The gaming machine B1 characterized in that it is possible to simultaneously form a blocking state that blocks the transmission of a driving force to the first moving member.

According to the gaming machine B1, when the driving force of the driving means is generated, the driving force is transmitted to the first moving member and the second moving member by the transmitting means, and the first moving member and the second moving member move. Will be done. In this case, the transmission means can simultaneously form a transmission state in which the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the second moving member and a blocking state in which the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the first moving member is blocked. Therefore, the operation mode of stopping the first moving member while moving the second moving member can be achieved by the driving means of 1.

That is, when the first moving member and the second moving member are moved by one driving means, in the conventional product, there are two driving states, a state in which the driving means generates a driving force and a state in which the driving force is stopped. Since the structure is such that the operation modes of the first moving member and the second moving member are switched by forming the above, only the operation mode in which both the first moving member and the second moving member move together or both stop together. Was formed, and it was not possible to move one of the first moving member or the second moving member while stopping the other. That is, in order to move one and stop the other, it was necessary to separately provide a driving means for driving (moving) one and a driving means for driving (moving) the other. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-139766).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, as described above, the operation mode of moving one of the first moving member or the second moving member and stopping the other can be achieved by the driving means of 1, so that the first moving member can be achieved. It is possible to reduce the number of driving means and reduce the product cost while making it possible to exert the effect of moving and stopping the second moving member.

In the gaming machine B1, the transmission means transmits the driving force generated by the driving means to the first moving member and the driving force generated by the driving means to the second moving member. The first transmission member includes a second transmission member, and the first transmission member includes a first drive means side member in which teeth for which driving force is transmitted from the drive means are formed at least partially or all around, and a first drive means thereof. With the first moving member side member, which is formed to be meshable with the side member and has teeth formed at least partially or all around to transmit the driving force transmitted from the first driving means side member to the first moving member. , And at least one of the first driving means side member or the first moving member side member has teeth not formed and cannot be meshed with the other of the first driving means side member or the first moving member side member. A gaming machine B2 comprising a non-forming portion to be formed.

According to the gaming machine B2, when the driving force of the driving means is generated, the driving force is transmitted to the first moving member by the first transmitting member and is transmitted to the second moving member by the second transmitting member. The first moving member and the second moving member are moved, respectively.

In this case, in the first transmission member, the first drive means side member and the first moving member side member are formed so as to be meshable with each other. Therefore, when the first drive means side member is rotated by the drive force of the drive means, The first moving member side member meshed with the first driving means side member is rotated, and the driving force is transmitted to the first moving member through the rotation of the first moving member side member, and the first moving member Is moved. Further, since one of the first driving means side member and the first moving member side member includes a non-forming portion in which teeth are not formed, the first driving means side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the first driving means side member is rotated. When the non-forming portion is arranged at the meshing position of the 1 drive means side member and the 1st moving member side member, the 1st drive means side member and the 1st moving member side member are made incompatible with each other, and the drive means The transmission of the driving force to the first moving member is cut off (a cutoff state is formed). That is, the formation of the cutoff state by the first transmission member can be performed independently of the transmission of the driving force to the second moving member by the second transmission member. Thereby, the operation mode of stopping the first moving member while moving the second moving member can be achieved by one driving means.

As described above, according to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the first transmission member is composed of the first driving means side member and the first moving member side member, and the first driving means side member or the first driving means side member or the first moving member side member. Since the non-formed portion is provided on at least one of the first moving member side members with the teeth non-formed, the relative rotation position between the first driving means side member and the first moving member side member (of the non-formed portion). The cutoff state and the transmission state can be switched according to the rotation position). That is, since the configuration for achieving such switching of states does not require an actuator device and can be configured only with gears, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced.

In the gaming machine B2, when the transmission state of transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the first moving member is formed by the first transmitting member, the second transmitting member receives the driving force of the driving means from the driving means. The gaming machine B3, characterized in that it is possible to form a cutoff state in which the transmission of a driving force to a moving member is cut off.

According to the gaming machine B3, the second transmission member is transferred from the driving means to the second moving member when the transmission state for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the first moving member is formed by the first transmitting member. Since it is possible to form a blocking state that blocks the transmission of the driving force of the above, the operation mode of stopping the second moving member while moving the first moving member can be achieved by one driving means. That is, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2 (that is, the effect that the operation mode of stopping the first moving member while moving the second moving member can be achieved by the driving means 1), while moving the first moving member. The operation mode of stopping the second moving member can be achieved by one driving means. As a result, the number of driving means can be reduced, the product cost can be reduced, and the variation of the moving and stopping operation modes of the first moving member and the second moving member can be increased to enhance the effect of the effect. it can.

In the gaming machine B3, the second transmission member includes a groove-shaped groove portion and a pin portion movably formed along the groove portion, and the groove portion and the pin portion are from the driving means to the second moving member. The pin portion is arranged in the transmission path of the driving force of the above, and the pin portion is moved along the groove portion, so that a transmission state in which the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the second moving member can be formed. The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that by stopping the pin portion with respect to the groove portion, it is possible to form a blocking state in which transmission of a driving force from the driving means to the second moving member is blocked.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B3, the pin portion is moved along the groove portion, so that it is possible to form a transmission state in which the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the second moving member. On the other hand, when the pin portion is stopped with respect to the groove portion, it is possible to form a cutoff state in which the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the second moving member is blocked, so that the driving force of the driving means is moved to the first position. When the transmission state to be transmitted to the member is formed by the first transmission member (that is, the first moving member is being moved), the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the second moving member is blocked. , While stopping the second moving member, when the driving force from the driving means to the first moving member is blocked by the first transmitting member (that is, the first moving member is stopped), the driving means The driving force of the second moving member can be transmitted to the second moving member to move the second moving member.

In the gaming machine B4, the second transmission member is a second drive means side member in which teeth for which driving force is transmitted from the drive means are formed at least partially or all around, and a second drive means side member thereof. Teeth that are meshably formed and transmit the driving force transmitted from the second driving means side member to the second moving member are formed at least partially or all around, and one of the groove portion or the pin portion is arranged. The second moving member side member is provided, and the second driving means side member is arranged coaxially with the first driving means side member of the first transmission member, and the second moving member side member is provided. B5 is a gaming machine B5, characterized in that the first moving member is coaxially arranged with the first moving member side member of the first transmitting member.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of the game machine B4, the second drive means side member and the second moving member side member of the second transmission member are the first drive means side member and the first movement of the first transmission member. Since they are arranged coaxially with the member side members, backlash between the second drive means side member and the second moving member side member of the second transmission member, and the first drive means side member of the first transmission member and Backlash between the first moving member side members can be generated in the same direction, and thereby it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a deviation in the effect timing between the first moving member and the second moving member.

In the gaming machine B5, the second drive means side member of the second transmission member may be fixed to the first drive means side member of the first transmission member. According to this, since the second drive means side member of the second transmission member is fixed to the first drive means side member of the first transmission member, it is attached to both the first drive means side member and the second drive means side member. A member for transmitting the driving force of the driving means is not required, and a member for transmitting the driving force to either the first driving means side member or the second driving means side member is sufficient. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, or the parts can be downsized to reduce the product cost.

Here, the fact that the first drive means side member is fixed to the second drive means side member means that it is sufficient if the rotations of the first drive means side member and the second drive means side member are synchronized. Therefore, the first drive means side member and the second drive means side member may be formed separately and fixed to each other, or may be integrally formed. When they are formed separately, as a method of fixing the two, for example, bonding with an adhesive, welding with ultrasonic waves, fastening with screws, and a method of fitting a protrusion provided on one side into a recess or a hole provided on the other side. , A method combining these is exemplified.

A game including a moving member formed movably, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving force to the moving member. In the machine, the transmission means is formed so that the teeth to which the driving force is transmitted from the driving means are formed at least a part or the entire circumference of the driving means side member and the driving means side member thereof so as to be meshable with the driving means. The driving means side member and the moving member side member include a moving member side member in which teeth for transmitting the driving force transmitted from the means side member to the moving member are formed at least partially or all around, and the driving means side member and the moving member side member are described. When the non-formed portions whose teeth are non-formed and cannot be meshed with each other are provided, and the non-formed portions are arranged at the toothing positions of the drive means side member and the moving member side member, the moving member side. The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the non-formed portion of the member is formed so as to be in contact with the non-formed portion of the drive means side member.

According to the gaming machine C1, when the driving means side member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, the moving member side member meshed with the driving means side member is rotated, and the moving member side member is rotated along with the rotation of the moving member side member. , The moving member is moved. When the driving means side member is further rotated by the driving force of the driving means and the non-forming portions are arranged at the toothing positions of the driving means side member and the moving member side member, the driving means side member and the moving member side member become Is said to be incompatible. As a result, the transmission of the driving force from the driving means to the moving member is cut off (a cutoff state is formed), and the moving member is stopped. That is, the moving member is arranged at the end of the moving range. In this case, since the non-formed portion of the moving member side member is formed so as to be in contact with the non-formed portion of the drive means side member, the non-formed portion of the moving member side member hits the non-formed portion of the drive means side member. It is possible to regulate the rotation of the moving member side member in the contacting direction. That is, the movement of the moving member can be regulated.

In this case, the moving member has conventionally been stopped as follows. That is, when a sensor device for detecting the rotation position of the drive means side member or the moving member side member is provided and the sensor device detects the rotation of the drive means side member or the moving member side member to a predetermined rotation position, It is determined that the moving member has reached the end of the moving range, and the driving of the driving means is stopped. Alternatively, when the drive amount of the drive means (for example, the number of steps when the drive means is composed of a step motor) is detected (counted) and the drive amount reaches a predetermined amount, the moving member ends the movement range. Is determined to have reached, and the driving of the driving means is stopped (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-12640). In this case, for example, the driving means may not be stopped even though the moving member has reached the end of the moving range due to poor detection of the rotational position or the driving amount due to the influence of electrical noise. obtain. Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine, a stopper is provided at the end of the moving range of the moving member, and when the driving means is not stopped properly, the stopper regulates the movement of the moving member. However, in such a structure in which the movement of the moving member is regulated by the stopper, when the moving member collides with the stopper, not only the moving member and the stopper may be damaged, but also an excessive load is applied to the driving means. It may act and cause damage to the driving means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, as described above, when the moving member reaches the end of the moving range, the driving means side member and the moving member side member cannot be meshed with each other. Since the transmission of the driving force to the moving member is cut off, the moving member can be stopped even when the driving force of the driving means continues to be generated. Therefore, damage due to collision between the moving member and other members can be avoided. Further, even if the moving member collides with another member, the moving member is separated from the driving means and the driving means is idling, so that an excessive load acts on the driving means. It can be avoided.

Further, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member formed so as to be movable and a driving means for applying a driving force to the moving member are provided, and the moving member is moved within a predetermined moving range by the driving force of the driving means. There is a gaming machine to be used (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-12640).
In this case, for example, when the end of the moving range of the moving member is the ascending position and gravity is applied to the moving member arranged at the end of the moving range, the moving member moves (descends) due to the action of gravity. You need to avoid it. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the movement (descending) of the moving member is regulated by making the driving force of the driving means oppose gravity (weight of the moving member) (that is, the moving member is set at the end of the moving range. Since it has a structure (holding), the energy consumption required for holding the moving member is high.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, as described above, when the moving member is arranged at the end of the moving range, the non-forming portion of the moving member side member is brought into contact with the non-forming portion of the driving means side member. Therefore, the rotation of the moving member side member (movement of the moving member) can be regulated. That is, in the gaming machine C1, when the moving member is arranged at the end of the moving range, the moving member and the driving means are separated from each other, so that the moving member cannot be held at the end by using the driving force of the driving means. , The moving member can be mechanically held at the end of the moving range by utilizing the contact of the non-forming portion. As a result, the energy consumption required for holding the moving member can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine C1, the non-forming portion of the driving means side member and the non-forming portion of the moving member side member are arranged at the toothing positions of the driving means side member and the moving member side member, and are brought into contact with each other. In this case, the gaming machine C2 is formed in a shape capable of restricting the rotation of the moving member side member in both directions.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the non-forming portion of the driving means side member and the non-forming portion of the moving member side member are arranged at the toothing positions of the driving means side member and the moving member side member. When they are in contact with each other (that is, when the moving means is arranged at the end of the moving range), the moving member is formed in a shape that can regulate the rotation of the moving member side member in both directions. The moving member when the end of the moving range is reached, as compared with the case where the rotation of the side member is formed in a shape that can be regulated in only one direction (for example, only the direction in which the moving member is moved by the action of gravity). Since the vibration of the moving member can be converged, the moving member can be quickly positioned at the end of the moving range, and the moving member can be held in a stable state at the end of the moving range, the moving member that should be in the stopped state is an external force (for example, a game). It is possible to suppress vibration and misalignment due to (external force generated by a person hitting or shaking the game board).

In the gaming machine C2, the non-forming portion of the driving means side member is formed by being curved in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the driving means side member, and the non-forming portion of the moving member side member is the driving. When arranged at the toothing position of the means side member and the moving member side member, it has an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the drive means side member and has the same diameter as the arc of the non-formed portion of the drive means side member. Alternatively, the gaming machine C3 is characterized in that it is formed by being curved in an arc shape having a slightly large diameter.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C2, the non-forming portion of the driving means side member is formed by being curved in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the driving means side member, and is formed on the moving member side. When the non-formed portion of the member is arranged at the tooth position of the drive means side member and the moving member side member, the non-formed portion has an arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the drive means side member and the drive means side member is not formed. Since it is formed by being curved in an arc shape having the same diameter as or slightly larger than the arc of the portion, the non-formed portion of the moving member side member can be smoothly brought into contact with the non-formed portion of the drive means side member. The two can be easily brought into contact with each other by surface contact. As a result, the non-formed portions can be brought into contact with each other smoothly, the impact when the moving member reaches the end of the moving range and is stopped can be relaxed, and the contact pressure between the non-formed portions can be reduced. , The durability of the drive means side member and the moving member side member can be improved.

Further, since the non-formed portion of the drive means side member and the non-formed portion of the moving member side member are curved in a concentric arc shape, the moving member side member can be operated regardless of the rotation position (phase) of the driving means side member. The non-formed portion can be brought into contact with the non-formed portion of the drive means side member, and the rotation of the moving member side member in both directions can be regulated. That is, even if the drive side gear is further rotated after the moving member reaches the end of the moving range, the rotation of the moving member side member can be regulated in both directions, and as a result, the moving member is held at the end of the moving range. can do.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the moving member side member includes a plurality of fastened portions, and the moving member is fastened and fixed to the moving member side gear via the plurality of fastened portions. A gaming machine C4 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine C4, since the moving member is fastened and fixed to the moving member side member via the plurality of fastened portions, one structure is formed by the moving member side member and the moving member connected at the plurality of points. it can. That is, the rigidity of the moving member side member can be increased by utilizing the rigidity of the moving member. That is, since the moving member side member receives a reaction force from the drive means side member when the non-formed portion is brought into contact with the non-formed portion of the drive means side member, the rigidity for resisting the reaction force is ensured. On the other hand, for example, if the wall thickness is increased, the weight increases, and if a highly rigid material is adopted, the material cost increases. However, according to the game machine C4, the rigidity of the moving member is used (that is, the movement is performed). In order to increase the rigidity of the moving member side member (by being integrated with the member), it is not necessary to thicken the moving member side member or use a highly rigid material. As a result, it is possible to improve the durability of the moving member side member while reducing the weight and cost of the moving member side member.

The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the moving member side member is arranged at a position where the fastened portion faces the driving means side member with a non-formed portion of the moving member side member interposed therebetween. C5.

According to the gaming machine C5, in the gaming machine C4, the moving member side member is arranged at a position where the fastened portion faces the driving means side member with the non-formed portion of the moving member side member interposed therebetween. It is possible to effectively increase the rigidity of the portion that receives the reaction force from the drive means side member when the non-formed portion of the member side member is brought into contact with the non-formed portion of the drive means side member. As a result, it is possible to further achieve both weight reduction and cost reduction of the moving member side member and improvement of durability of the moving member side member.

It is more preferable that the fastened portion of the moving member gear is arranged at a position facing the rotation axis of the driving means side member with the non-formed portion of the moving member side member interposed therebetween. The reaction force received by the moving member side member when the non-formed portion of the moving member side member is brought into contact with the non-formed portion of the driving means side member is the rotation axis of the driving means side member and the non-forming portion of the moving member side member. Since the action is performed along the line connecting the drive means side members, the fastened portion is arranged at a position facing the rotation axis of the drive means side member, which has the effect of increasing the rigidity of the portion that receives the reaction force from the drive means side member. This is because it can be demonstrated even more.

In a gaming machine provided with a moving member rotatably formed about a first axis between a first position and a second position, and a driving means for generating a driving force for rotating the moving member, the above-mentioned game machine. The movement includes a rotating member that is rotated around a second axis by a driving force transmitted from the driving means, and a pin member that is arranged on the rotating member and is located eccentrically with respect to the second axis. The member includes a groove-shaped guide groove portion that guides the pin member along the inner wall surface, and the guide groove portion is recessed in the inner wall surface of the guide groove portion and is formed so as to be able to accept the pin member. D1 is characterized in that, at least in the first position, the pin member is received in the recess so that the moving member is mechanically held in the first position.

According to the gaming machine D1, when the driving force of the driving means is generated, the rotating member is rotated around the second axis by the driving force transmitted from the driving means, and the pin member arranged on the rotating member is rotated. Is guided along the guide groove portion of the moving member. Since the pin member is positioned eccentrically from the second axis of the rotating member, the moving member moves between the first position and the second position as the pin member is guided along the inner wall surface of the guide groove portion. It is rotated around one axis.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a first axis, a moving member rotated around the first axis, and a driving means for applying a driving force to the moving member are provided, and the driving force of the driving means is provided. There is a gaming machine that rotates a moving member between a first position and a second position with a first axis as a rotation center (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-12640). In this case, for example, when the first position is an ascending position, it is necessary to prevent the moving member arranged at the first position from moving (descending) due to the action of gravity. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the moving (lowering) of the moving member is regulated (that is, the moving member is held in the first position) by making the driving force of the driving means oppose the gravity (weight of the moving member). Because of the structure, the energy consumption required to hold the moving member is high.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, at least in the first position, the moving member is mechanically held in the first position by accepting the pin member in the recess recessed in the inner wall surface of the guide groove portion. .. That is, even if the driving force of the driving means is released, the moving member can be mechanically held at the first position, so that the energy consumption of the driving means can be suppressed accordingly.

Further, since the structure is such that the pin member is received in the recess recessed in the inner wall surface of the guide groove portion and the moving member is mechanically held in the first position, the moving member is mechanically held in the first position only by the inner wall surface of the guide groove portion. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the guide groove portion and the rotating member as compared with the structure of holding the guide groove.

The recess does not have to be bottomed and may penetrate. That is, it suffices to have inner wall surfaces that communicate with the guide groove and face each other. The same applies to the concepts of various inventions shown below.

In the gaming machine D1, at least at the first position, the inner wall surface of the recess is substantially parallel to the direction connecting the first axis and the pin member, and the direction connecting the second axis and the pin member. A gaming machine D2 characterized in that it is substantially orthogonal to the game machine D2.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, at least in the first position, the inner wall surface of the recess is arranged so as to be substantially parallel to the direction connecting the first axis and the pin member. Moreover, since it is arranged in a direction substantially orthogonal to the direction connecting the second axis and the pin member, rotation around the first axis of the moving member even when the driving force of the driving means is released. Is that the inner wall surface of the recess presses the pin member in a direction parallel to the direction connecting the second axis and the pin member. Therefore, depending on the pressing of the pin member due to the rotation of the moving member, the rotating member may be pressed. It is not possible to form a rotation about the second axis. As a result, the moving member can be held more firmly at the first position. Therefore, for example, when the player hits or shakes the gaming machine, even if the moving member is shaken, the moving member can be reliably held in the first position and moves downward in the direction of gravity ( It is possible to prevent it from falling).

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the inner wall surface of the recess is formed by being curved in an arc shape centered on the second axis of the rotating member in a state where the moving member is arranged at the first position. The gaming machine D3.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the inner wall surface of the recess is curved in an arc shape centered on the second axis of the rotating member in the state where the moving member is arranged at the first position. After the moving member is arranged at the first position, the pin member can be received in the recess while suppressing the posture of the moving member from fluctuating.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the recess is an inner wall surface facing the guide groove portion, and the pin member slides when the moving member is moved from the second position to the first position. A gaming machine D4 characterized in that it is recessed in the inner wall surface on the side of the pachinko machine.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the recess is the facing inner wall surface of the guide groove portion, and when the moving member is moved from the second position to the first position. Since the pin member is recessed in the inner wall surface on the sliding side, the moving member can be moved from the second position to the first position without switching the driving direction of the driving means (rotational direction of the rotating member). , The pin member can be accepted in the recess to hold the moving member in the first position.

A gaming machine D5, wherein in any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the recess is an inner wall surface facing the guide groove portion and is recessed in the inner wall surface on the side closer to the first axis.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the recess is the facing inner wall surface of the guide groove portion and is recessed in the inner wall surface on the side closer to the first axis. A recess can be provided in a region that becomes a dead space between the guide groove portion and the first shaft, and the size can be reduced accordingly. Further, by disposing the recess on the first shaft side in this way, the distance between the first shaft and the pin member when the moving member is arranged at the first position can be shortened, so that the moving member can be shortened. The force with which the inner wall surface of the recess presses the pin member can be reduced with the rotation about the first axis of the above. As a result, the moving member can be held more firmly at the first position.

A moving member formed so as to be slidable, a driving means for generating a driving force for sliding the moving member, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving force to the moving member are provided. The gaming machine includes a base member having a slide hole formed as an opening extending along the slide movement direction of the moving member, and the moving member is inserted into the slide hole of the base member. The transmission means is provided on the other surface side of the base member, which is opposite to one surface side of the base member on which the moving member is arranged, and moves the driving force of the driving means. A link member that transmits to the member is provided, and the link member projects to the other surface side of the base member through a slide hole of the base member. A gaming machine E1 characterized by being connected to.

According to the gaming machine E1, when the driving force of the driving means is generated, the link member of the transmitting means is displaced by the driving force transmitted from the driving means, and the displacement of the link member is transmitted to the protruding portion of the moving member. Will be done. As a result, the protruding portion of the moving member is moved along the slide hole, so that the moving member is slid.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member formed so as to be slidable, a driving means for generating a driving force for sliding the moving member, and a driving force generated by the driving means are moved. There is a gaming machine provided with a transmission means for transmitting to a member, the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the moving member by the transmitting means, and the moving member is slidably moved (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-229858). .. In this case, in order to stably slide the moving member, it is preferable to increase the number of protruding portions to be inserted into the slide holes. On the other hand, if the number of protruding portions is increased, the number of parts for holding the protruding portions (preventing them from coming off from the slide hole) also increases, and the cost increases. Therefore, there has been a demand for a method of reducing costs while stabilizing the sliding movement of the moving member.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the transmission means includes a link member that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the moving member, and the link member is opposite to the one side of the base member on which the moving member is arranged. It is arranged on the other side of the base member on the side, and is connected to at least one of the plurality of protrusions of the moving member that protrudes to the other side of the base member through the slide hole of the base member. Therefore, at least one of the parts for holding the protruding portion can be used as the link member. As a result, it is possible to secure the number of protrusions, enable stable slide movement of the moving member, reduce the number of parts for holding the protrusions, and reduce the cost.

In the gaming machine E1, the transmission means includes a connecting member that is connected to the link member and transmits the driving force transmitted from the driving means to the link member, and the base member has a connecting hole formed as an opening. The driving means and the connecting member of the transmitting means are arranged on one surface side of the base member, and the connecting member is connected to the link member through a connecting hole of the base member. Pachinko machine E2.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the transmission means includes a connecting member connected to the link member and transmitting the driving force transmitted from the driving means to the link member, and a connection formed as an opening. Since the base member has holes and the connecting member is connected to the link member through the connecting hole of the base member, the connecting member of the driving means and the transmitting means can be arranged on one surface side of the base member together with the moving member. it can. As a result, the constituent members can be concentrated on one surface side of the base member (that is, the arrangement of the constituent members on the other surface side of the base member can be suppressed), and as a result, the space can be efficiently used. It is possible to reduce the size as a whole.

In the gaming machine E2, the link member of the transmission means is rotatably pivotally supported by the base member on the other surface side of the base member.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the driving force of the driving means can be stably transmitted to the moving member. That is, in the transmission means, a connecting member is arranged on one surface side of the base member, and a link member is arranged on the other surface side of the base member, and these connecting members and the link members are connected via the connecting holes of the base member. Therefore, the transmission path of the driving force formed by these connecting members and the link members becomes long. Therefore, when the driving force of the driving means is transmitted, the connecting member and the link member may be deformed and may not be stably transmitted to the moving member. On the other hand, since the link member is rotatably supported by the base member on the other surface side of the base member, the rigidity of the base member is used to increase the rigidity of the connecting member and the link member as a whole. As a result, the driving force of the driving means can be stably transmitted to the moving member via the connecting member and the link member.

In particular, in the gaming machine E3, since the link member among the connecting member and the link member is rotatably supported by the base member, the base member is rotatably supported as compared with the case where the connecting member is rotatably supported by the base member. The distance from the shaft support portion to the protruding portion of the moving member can be shortened, and as a result, stabilization of transmission of the driving force of the driving means to the moving member can be achieved with fewer shaft support points.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the base member is formed in a plate shape and is arranged in a posture perpendicular to the extending direction of the slide hole, and the moving member is arranged along the slide hole of the base member. The gaming machine E4, which is characterized in that the slingshot is moved in the vertical direction.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the base member is formed in a plate shape and is arranged in a posture in which the extending direction of the slide hole is perpendicular to the base member. Since the moving member is slid and moved in the vertical direction along the slide hole of the above, the moving member can be stably slid and moved by making the configuration in which the link member is arranged on the other surface side of the base member effective. That is, when the base member is arranged in a posture in which the extending direction of the slide hole is the vertical direction, the moving member is in a forward leaning posture in a direction away from one surface side of the base member due to the action of gravity. Since the base member is interposed between the link member connected to the moving member and the moving member, the forward leaning posture of the moving member is regulated not only by the component for holding the protruding portion but also by the link member. As a result, the moving member can be slid and moved in a stable state.

In the gaming machine E4, the link member is connected to a protrusion located above at least the center of the moving member.

According to the gaming machine E5, since the link member is connected to the protruding portion located at least above the center of the moving member, the link member is tilted forward in a direction away from one surface side of the base member by the action of gravity. The forward tilting posture of the moving member can be effectively regulated by the link member with respect to the moving member, and as a result, the moving member can be slid and moved in a more stable state.

A game including a moving member formed so as to be movable, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving force to the moving member. In the machine, in the transmission means, a pinion to which a driving force is transmitted from the driving means and a tooth surface to be meshed with the pinion are arranged substantially parallel to a horizontal plane and displaced in the horizontal direction as the pinion rotates. The rack is provided with a link member having one end connected to the rack and the other end connected to the moving member so as to stand up or tilt as the rack moves in the horizontal direction. The moving member is arranged in the ascending position and the moving member is arranged in the descending position due to the tilting of the link member. At the ascending position of the moving member, the direction connecting one end and the other end of the link member is the direction of the rack. The gaming machine F1 is located in a plane orthogonal to each of the tooth surface and the moving direction of the rack.

According to the game machine F1, the pinion is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and when the rack is displaced to one side in the horizontal direction by the rotation of the pinion, the link member is displaced due to the displacement of the rack to one side in the horizontal direction. As the link member is tilted and the link member is tilted, the moving member is moved downward (lowered) toward the lower position, while when the rack is displaced to the other side in the horizontal direction due to the rotation of the pinion, the horizontal direction of the rack etc. The link member is erected with the displacement to the side, and as the link member is erected, the moving member is moved (raised) upward toward the ascending position.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member formed movably, a driving means for generating a driving force applied to the moving member, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the moving member. There is a gaming machine in which a transmission means is formed by including a rack and pinion as a part of a transmission path of a driving force (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-065923). In this case, when the moving member is arranged in the ascending position, it is necessary to prevent the moving member from moving (descending) due to the action of gravity. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the moving (lowering) of the moving member is regulated (that is, the moving member is held in the ascending position) by making the driving force of the driving means oppose the gravity (weight of the moving member). ) Due to the structure, the energy consumption required to hold the moving member is high.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, at the ascending position of the moving member, the directions connecting one end and the other end of the link member are located in a plane orthogonal to the tooth surface of the rack and the moving direction of the rack. As a force component acting on the rack from the link member, it is possible to suppress the generation of a force component in the direction of moving the rack in the horizontal direction. As a result, even if the driving force of the driving means is released, the moving member can be held in the ascending position, and as a result, the energy consumption required for holding the moving member can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine F1, the pachinko machine F1 includes a base member in which the pinion and the rack of the transmission means are rotatably and movably arranged, respectively, and the transmission means includes at least a pair of the rack and the link member, and the link member includes the link member. The base members are arranged to face each other along the moving direction of the rack, and the base members are interposed between the facing surfaces of the pair of link members when the moving members are arranged in the raised position, and the pair of links. The gaming machine F2 is provided with an interposition portion formed so as to be in contact with the facing surfaces of the members.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, when the moving member is arranged in the raised position, it is interposed between the facing surfaces of the pair of link members and on the facing surfaces of the pair of link members. Since the base member includes an interposition portion formed so as to be abuttable, the posture of the moving member can be stabilized in the ascending position. That is, in the ascending position, since the pair of link members are erected, it is difficult to maintain the posture, and the posture of the moving member tends to be unstable. By doing so, it is possible to regulate the displacement of the pair of link members in the opposite direction (that is, the moving direction of the rack) by the interposing portion. As a result, the pair of link members can be maintained in an upright state, and the posture of the moving member can be stabilized in the ascending position.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the transmission means includes a base member in which the pinion and the rack of the transmission means are rotatably and movably arranged, respectively, and the transmission means includes at least a pair of the rack and the link member and the link member. Are arranged facing each other along the moving direction of the rack, and the base member is a pair of facing wall portions extending along the moving direction of the rack and facing each other at predetermined intervals. The gaming machine F3 is provided, wherein one end side of the pair of link members is interposed between the facing surfaces of the pair of facing wall portions.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the base member includes a pair of facing wall portions extending along the moving direction of the rack and arranged to face each other at predetermined intervals. Therefore, the moving member can be moved in a stable posture. That is, since a pair of link members are arranged facing each other along the moving direction of the rack, the pair of link members arranged facing each other with respect to the moving direction of the rack cancel each other's displacements. It can fit and maintain its posture. On the other hand, since the moving member of the link member is offset in the direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the rack, the position of the center of gravity of the link member tends to fluctuate due to the input of disturbance, and it is difficult to maintain the posture. However, since one end side of the pair of link members is interposed between the facing surfaces of the pair of facing wall portions, the direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the rack of the pair of link members by these pair of facing wall portions. The displacement to can be regulated. As a result, the posture of the pair of link members can be maintained, and the moving members can be moved in a stable posture.

In the gaming machine F3, at least one of the pair of facing wall portions of the base member is increased in height as the moving member approaches the ascending position.

According to the gaming machine F4, as the moving member approaches the ascending position (that is, as the link member stands up), the standing height of the facing wall portion increases (that is, one end of the link member with respect to the facing wall portion). Since the area facing the side is increased), it is possible to stabilize the movement of the moving member while improving the appearance. That is, by partially raising the standing height of the facing wall portion instead of raising it as a whole, it is possible to suppress the appearance from being spoiled by the facing wall portion, and the link member is erected (that is,). (It becomes difficult to move the moving member in a stable posture), the effect of maintaining the posture of the link member can be enhanced by the facing wall portion. As a result, the moving member can be moved in a stable posture while suppressing the appearance from being spoiled.

In this case, at least one of the pair of facing wall portions of the base member, the portion where the standing height is raised is in a state where the moving member is arranged in the descending position (that is, the link member is laid down). It is preferable that the height is set so that the link member can face the other end side (the side connected to the moving member). According to this configuration, the effect of maintaining the posture of the moving member arranged in the descending position can be obtained at the same time by utilizing the portion where the standing height is increased in order to stabilize the posture of the moving member during movement. Can be done.

In any of the game machines F1 to F4, an extension member extending in a direction orthogonal to the tooth surface of the rack is provided, and the moving member is slidably connected to the extension member and is extended. The extension member is provided with a guide portion that is guided along the extension direction of the member, and the moving member is offset in a direction parallel to the tooth surface of the rack and orthogonal to the movement direction of the rack. The gaming machine F5 is provided between the link member and the position of the center of gravity of the moving member in a direction in which the moving member is offset.

According to the gaming machine F5, in any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, an extending member extending in a direction orthogonal to the tooth surface of the rack and guiding a guide portion of the moving member along the extending direction is provided. Since the extension member is arranged between the link member and the position of the center of gravity of the moving member in the direction in which the moving member is offset, the effect of offsetting the moving member (that is, necessary for holding the moving member) is provided. It is possible to ensure the smooth movement of the moving member while demonstrating (suppression of energy consumption).

When a pair of link members are provided and an interposing portion is provided between the pair of link members facing each other, it is preferable to dispose the extending member inside the interposing portion. An extension member is placed in the central part where the pair of link members face each other, and while enhancing the effect of guiding the movement of the moving member, the inside of the intermediate part that becomes a dead space is effectively utilized to reduce the size as a whole. Because it can be done.

A game including a moving member formed movably, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving force to the moving member. In the machine, the transmission member has a first transmission member having at least a part of teeth and to which the moving member is connected, and a second having at least a part of teeth that can be meshed with the teeth of the first transmission member. A transmission member and a connecting member connected to the second transmission member and transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the second transmission member are provided, and the connecting member is continuous with the teeth of the second transmission member. A gaming machine G1 characterized in that teeth are formed.

According to the gaming machine G1, when the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the second transmission member via the connecting member, the second transmission member is rotated, and the rotation of the second transmission member causes the teeth of each other to rotate. It is transmitted to the first transmission member via the above, and the first transmission member is rotated. As a result, the moving member connected to the first transmission member is moved with the rotation of the first transmission member.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member formed movably, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a driving force generated by the driving means are transferred to the moving member. A first transmission member having a transmission means for transmission and to which a moving member is connected, and a second transmission member that is toothed with the first transmission member and transmits the driving force of the drive means to the first transmission member through the tooth engagement. There is a gaming machine in which a part of the transmission means is formed by the transmission member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-10376). In this case, the second transmission member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and the first transmission member meshed with the second transmission member is rotated so that the moving member connected to the first transmission member is rotated. It is moved with the rotation of the first transmission member. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the moving member is connected to the first transmission member, the first transmission member and the second transmission member are rotated by the driving force of the driving means to move the moving member. If the moving member shakes during this period, the first transmission member may be displaced due to the shaking of the moving member, and the teeth with the second transmission member may be disengaged. Even if it is possible to prevent the teeth of the first transmission member and the second transmission member from coming off, the tooth engagement area of the second transmission member with the teeth is increased by the amount that the first transmission member is displaced due to the shaking of the moving member. As the surface pressure is concentrated on a part of the tooth surface due to the decrease, uneven wear of the tooth may be caused and the durability may be lowered.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, the connecting member has teeth that are continuous with the teeth of the second transmission member, so that even if the first transmission member is displaced due to the shaking of the moving member, the teeth are formed. The teeth of the first transmission member can be meshed with the teeth formed on the connecting member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the teeth of the first transmission member and the second transmission member from being disengaged. Further, when the first transmission member is displaced due to the shaking of the moving member, the tooth engagement area between the teeth of the first transmission member and the teeth of the second transmission member and the connecting member can be secured, so that the teeth of each of these teeth are biased. It is possible to suppress wear and improve durability.

The teeth of the first transmission member and the teeth of the second transmission member do not have to be formed over the entire circumference, and it is sufficient that the teeth are formed in a part in the circumferential direction. The same applies to the following. The same applies to other gears.

In the gaming machine G1, the connecting member is erected from the axial end face of the second transmission member along the axial direction of the second transmission member, and the tooth forming portion on which the tooth is formed and the tooth forming thereof. The tooth-forming portion is provided with a main body portion connected to the erecting tip of the portion, and the surface of the tooth-forming portion on the side opposite to the side on which the tooth is formed is curved in an arc shape centered on the axis of the second transmission member. A gaming machine G2 characterized in that it is formed as a concave curved surface.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1, the tooth forming portion of the connecting member is erected from the axial end surface of the second transmitting member along the axial direction of the second transmitting member, and the second Since the surface opposite to the side on which the continuous teeth are formed on the teeth of the transmission member is formed as a concave curved surface curved in an arc shape centered on the axis of the second transmission member, the tooth forming portion of the connecting member can be formed. Even when connecting to the axial end surface of the second transmission member, the area of the axial end surface of the second transmission member can be secured, and the fixing member mounted on the axial end surface of the second transmission member is increased accordingly. The diameter can be increased. Further, when the second transmission member and the connecting member are integrally molded from the resin material, the tooth-forming portion is formed by forming the surface opposite to the surface on which the teeth are formed as a concave curved surface as described above. It is possible to make the wall thickness in the above uniform and improve its moldability.

In the gaming machine G2, the gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the teeth are formed in the tooth forming portion of the connecting member over a range from the axial end surface of the second transmission member to the main body portion.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, teeth are formed in the tooth forming portion of the connecting member over a range from the axial end surface of the second transmission member to the main body portion, so that teeth are formed. It is possible to more reliably suppress the disengagement of the teeth of the first transmission member and the second transmission member by sufficiently securing the area to be formed. Further, when the second transmission member and the connecting member are integrally molded from the resin material, the teeth are formed over the entire tooth forming portion as described above, so that the wall thickness in the tooth forming portion is the entire thickness. It can be made uniform over the entire range to improve its moldability.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, a second moving member in which the first transmitting member and the second transmitting member are arranged and movably formed, and a guide for guiding the second moving member in a linear direction. The transmitting means includes a pinion to which a driving force is transmitted from the driving means, and a rack that is meshed with the pinion and displaced with the rotation of the pinion, and the connecting member comprises. The gaming machine G4, characterized in that one end is connected to the rack and the other end is connected to the second transmission member.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G3, a second moving member on which the first transmission member and the second transmission member are arranged is provided, and the second moving member is a guide member. The transmission means is provided with a pinion to which the driving force is transmitted from the driving means and a rack that is meshed with the pinion and displaced as the pinion rotates, and the connecting member is attached to the rack. Since one end is connected and the other end is connected to the second transmission member, the rack and pinion is operated by the driving force of the driving means to displace the connecting member, and the second is caused by the displacement of the connecting member. The rotation of the transmission member and the linear movement of the second moving member can be performed at the same time. That is, since the moving member is connected to the first transmitting member that is meshed with the second transmitting member, the moving member can be linearly moved together with the second moving member while rotating the moving member. As a result, the effect of production can be enhanced. Further, since the transmission of the driving force of the driving means to the moving member and the transmission to the second moving member can be shared by one member (connecting member), the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. Can be planned.

In the game machine G4, in the rack, the tooth surface to be meshed with the pinion is arranged substantially parallel to the horizontal plane and is displaced in the horizontal direction as the pinion rotates, and the second moving member is horizontal to the rack. The guide member guides the connecting member in the vertical direction along with the displacement in the direction, and when the second moving member is arranged in the ascending position, the tooth formed in the tooth forming portion is transmitted to the first transmission member. The gaming machine G5, characterized in that it is arranged at a position corresponding to the teeth of the member.

According to the game machine G5, in the rack, the tooth surface to be meshed with the pinion is arranged substantially parallel to the horizontal plane and is displaced in the horizontal direction as the pinion rotates, and the second moving member is moved in the horizontal direction of the rack. Since the pinion is guided in the vertical direction by the guide member according to the displacement, the pinion is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and when the rack is displaced to the horizontal one side by the rotation of the pinion, the rack is moved to the horizontal one side. The connecting member is tilted along with the displacement of, and as the connecting member is tilted, the second moving member is moved downward (lowered) toward the lower position, while the rack is displaced horizontally to the other side due to the rotation of the pinion. Then, the connecting member is erected with the displacement of the rack to the other side in the horizontal direction, and as the connecting member is erected, the second moving member is moved (raised) upward toward the ascending position.

In this case, when the second moving member is arranged in the raised position, the connecting member is erected, which makes it difficult to maintain the posture, and the posture of the second moving member becomes unstable. Along with this, the posture of the moving member arranged on the second moving member becomes more unstable. Therefore, the shaking of the second moving member makes the shaking of the moving member more remarkable, and the displacement of the first transmission member due to the shaking of the moving member becomes large. That is, in the state where the second moving member is arranged in the raised position, the teeth of the first transmitting member and the second transmitting member are likely to come off.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G4, when the second moving member is arranged in the ascending position, the teeth formed in the tooth forming portion are first transmitted to the connecting member. Since it is arranged at a position corresponding to the teeth of the member, the displacement of the first transmission member due to the shaking of the moving member becomes large, and the teeth of the first transmission member and the second transmission member are most likely to come off. , The teeth formed in the tooth forming portion can be effectively utilized. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the teeth of the first transmission member and the second transmission member from being disengaged.

In the gaming machine G4 or G5, the transmission means is attached to the rack, a connecting member to which one end is connected to the rack, a second transmission member to which the other end of the connecting member is connected, and teeth to the second transmission member. A pair of a first transmission member to be combined and a moving member connected to the first transmission member is provided, and one set of the first transmission member and the second transmission member is the first transmission of the other set. One set and the other set may be arranged so as to face each other along the moving direction of the rack in a state of being toothed with the member and the second transmission member, respectively. According to this, it is possible to improve the synchronization accuracy between the moving member in one set and the moving member in the other set. Further, even in a form in which only the first transmission members or only the second transmission members are meshed with each other, the synchronization accuracy of the moving members can be improved, and the first transmission member and the second transmission member are By engaging each tooth, the tooth alignment portion (dental area) can be increased and the surface pressure of the tooth surface can be dispersed accordingly, so that the durability can be improved.

A plurality of movable members formed to be movable, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving each of the plurality of moving members, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the plurality of moving members, respectively. In a gaming machine in which the plurality of moving members are retracted to different retracted positions, and the plurality of moving members are combined by being moved from the different retracted positions and arranged at reference positions. The plurality of moving members are moved in a direction close to each other and arranged next to each other at the reference position, and the first moving member and the second moving member are adjacent to each other. A third moving member that comes into contact with each of the first moving member and the second moving member from substantially orthogonal directions is provided, and the third moving member is the first moving member and the second moving member at the reference position. By abutting on each of the members, a force is formed in the direction in which the first moving member and the second moving member are brought close to each other, and the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member are combined. A gaming machine H1 characterized in that it is played.

According to the gaming machine H1, the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member by the transmitting means, so that the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member are transmitted. The moving members are retracted to different retracted positions, and are moved from different retracted positions and placed at reference positions.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of movable members formed to be movable, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving each of the plurality of moving members, and a driving force of the driving means are used. A plurality of moving members are provided with transmission means for transmitting to each of the plurality of moving members, and the plurality of moving members are retracted to different retracted positions and moved from different retracted positions and arranged at reference positions. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-115300). In this case, if the plurality of moving members are not properly connected at the reference position, the effect of connecting the plurality of moving members is impaired. However, it is relatively easy to connect a pair of symmetrically shaped moving members facing each other as in the conventional gaming machine described above, but it is difficult to connect the three moving members.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the first moving member and the second moving member are arranged next to each other at the reference position, and are substantially orthogonal to the adjacent directions of the first moving member and the second moving member. When the third moving member moved from the direction toward the first moving member and the second moving member comes into contact with each of the first moving member and the second moving member, the first moving member and the second moving member are moved. Since the forces are formed in the directions in which they are close to each other, the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member can be appropriately combined. As a result, it is possible to secure the effect of combining the plurality of moving members.

In the gaming machine H1, the first moving member and the second moving member are provided with a first contact portion and a second contact portion, respectively, and are in contact with each of the first contact portion and the second contact portion. The third moving member is provided with a third contact portion, and the third contact portion of the third moving member is attached to the first contact portion and the second contact portion of the first moving member and the second moving member. When they are brought into contact with each other, a force is formed in the direction in which the first moving member and the second moving member are brought close to each other, and the first moving member and the second moving member face the third moving member. The external shape of the side is formed by the first contact portion and the second contact portion, and is a concave shape that is recessed toward the contact surface between the first moving member and the second moving member. In the third moving member, the appearance shape of the first moving member and the side facing the second moving member is formed by the third contact portion, and the first moving member and the second moving member have a concave shape. The gaming machine H2 is characterized in that it has a protruding shape in which the center protrudes correspondingly.

According to the gaming machine H2, the first moving member and the second moving member are arranged next to each other at the reference position, with respect to the first contact portion and the second contact portion of the first moving member and the second moving member. When the third contact portion of the third moving member is brought into contact with each other, a force is formed in the direction in which the first moving member and the second moving member are brought close to each other, whereby the first moving member and the second moving member are brought into contact with each other. And the third moving member is coupled.

In this case, the first moving member and the second moving member have a concave shape in which the center is recessed in the appearance shape (combination of the first contact portion and the second contact portion) on the side facing the third moving member. On the other hand, in the third moving member, the appearance shape (third contact portion) of the first moving member and the side facing the second moving member is centered corresponding to the concave shape of the first moving member and the second moving member. Since the projecting shape is such that the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member are moved from the retracted position to the reference position and joined at the reference position, the effect of the effect is improved. be able to.

That is, the appearance shapes of the first moving member and the second moving member and the third moving member on the opposite sides are concave as described above. In the form in which the third moving member that is moved toward the concave shape has a protruding shape, the first moving member and the second moving member that are arranged next to each other when the third moving member is arranged from the retracted position to the reference position. The player is reminded of a mode in which the third moving member enters between the members and pushes and spreads the first moving member and the second moving member in a direction away from each other. According to the gaming machine H2, the third moving member moves at the reference position. When the member (third contact portion) is brought into contact with the first moving member and the second moving member (first contact portion and second contact portion), the first moving member and the second moving member are brought into contact with each other. The first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member can be combined by forming a force in the approaching direction. As a result, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1, the operating machine can be operated in a mode different from the player's expectation, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine H2, the first moving member and the second moving member are supported by the base member by the first link mechanism and the second link mechanism, respectively, and the first moving member and the second moving member are supported at the reference position. In the state where they are arranged side by side, the first link mechanism and the second link mechanism may be arranged in a V shape in which the distance between the first moving member and the second moving member side is narrowed with respect to the base member side. preferable. By setting the angle formed by the first contact portion, the second contact portion, and the third contact portion with respect to the angle formed by the first link mechanism and the second link mechanism, the first movement is performed at the reference position. This is because a force can be formed in the direction in which the member and the second moving member are brought close to each other.

In the gaming machine H1, the appearance shape of the first moving member and the second moving member on the side facing the third moving member is recessed toward the contact surface between the first moving member and the second moving member. While the third moving member has a concave shape, the appearance shape of the third moving member on the side facing the first moving member and the second moving member corresponds to the concave shape of the first moving member and the second moving member. The gaming machine H3 characterized in that it has a protruding shape with a protruding center.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, the appearance shape of the first moving member and the second moving member on the side facing the third moving member is a concave shape with a concave center. The appearance shape of the third moving member on the side facing the first moving member and the second moving member is a protruding shape whose center protrudes corresponding to the concave shape of the first moving member and the second moving member. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect by moving the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member from the retracted position to the reference position and connecting them at the reference position.

That is, as described above, the appearance shapes of the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member on the opposite sides are concave, and the first moving member and the second moving member arranged next to each other have a concave shape. In the form in which the third moving member that is moved toward the concave shape has a protruding shape, the first moving member and the second moving member that are arranged next to each other when the third moving member is arranged from the retracted position to the reference position. The player is reminded of a mode in which the third moving member enters between the members and pushes and spreads the first moving member and the second moving member in a direction away from each other. According to the gaming machine H3, the third moving member moves at the reference position. When the members are brought into contact with each other, a force is formed in the direction in which the first moving member and the second moving member are brought close to each other, and the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member are connected to each other. Can be done. As a result, the player can operate in a mode different from the player's expectation, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine H3, the first moving member and the second moving member are provided with a first contact surface and a second contact surface, and are brought into contact with each of the first contact surface and the second contact surface. The third moving member includes a third contact surface, and at least one of the third contact surface, the first contact surface, and the second contact surface has the third moving member at the reference position. It is formed as an inclined surface that expands toward the traveling direction side when it is moved toward, and the third contact surface is brought into contact from both sides of the first contact surface and the second contact surface. The gaming machine H4, characterized in that the 1-moving member and the 2nd moving member are displaced in a direction in which they are close to each other.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3, at least one of the third contact surface, the first contact surface, and the second contact surface has the third moving member directed to the reference position. It is formed as an inclined surface that expands toward the traveling direction side when it is moved, and the third contact surface is brought into contact from both sides of the first contact surface and the second contact surface, so that the first moving member Since the second moving member and the second moving member are displaced in a direction close to each other, the first moving member and the second moving member can be reliably displaced in a direction close to each other. Therefore, the structure that enables the first moving member and the second moving member to be movable can be simplified, and the degree of freedom in designing the structure can be increased.

In the gaming machine H4, the first contact surface and the second contact surface are arranged on the back side of the portion forming the appearance shape of the first moving member and the second moving member, respectively, and the third one. The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that the contact surface is arranged on the back surface side of a portion forming the appearance shape of the third moving member.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H4, the first contact surface and the second contact surface are arranged on the back side of the first moving member and the portion forming the appearance shape of the second moving member, respectively. Since the third contact surface is arranged on the back side of the portion forming the appearance shape of the third moving member, the first contact surface, the second contact surface, and the third contact surface are provided. Can be suppressed from being visually recognized by the player. Therefore, by setting the concave shape and the protruding shape as the appearance shapes of the first moving member, the second moving member, and the third moving member, it is possible to enhance the effect of operating in a mode different from the player's expectation.

A moving member formed so as to be movable, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving force to the moving member are provided. In a gaming machine in which the transmission means includes a first transmission member and a second transmission member that is meshed with the first transmission member in a predetermined phase, the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member The gaming machine I1 comprising a positioning means for positioning the meshing position in the predetermined phase.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member formed movably, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a driving force generated by the driving means are transferred to the moving member. There is a gaming machine provided with a transmission means for transmitting, and the transmission means includes a first transmission member and a second transmission member that is meshed with the first transmission member in a predetermined phase (for example, special feature). (See Kai 2009-12502). According to this gaming machine, when one of the first transmission member or the second transmission member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, the rotation of one of them rotates the other of the first transmission member or the second transmission member. The moving member is moved by the rotation of the other side. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the second transmission member is not meshed with the first transmission member in a predetermined phase, the moving range of the moving member is deviated. Therefore, when assembling (toothing) the first transmission member and the second transmission member, it is necessary to position the toothing position of the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member in a predetermined phase before assembling. The positioning work was complicated.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, since the positioning means for positioning the tooth engagement position of the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member in a predetermined phase is provided, the first transmission member and the second transmission member are assembled (teeth). At the time of (matching), the first transmission member and the second transmission member can be assembled by using the positioning means. That is, when the toothing position of the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member is positioned at a predetermined phase, the workability of the positioning work can be improved.

As described above, the teeth of the first transmission member and the teeth of the second transmission member do not have to be formed over the entire circumference, and it is sufficient that the teeth are formed in a part in the circumferential direction.

In the gaming machine I1, the first transmission member and the second transmission member are rotatably supported by a base member, and the positioning means is a first base positioning portion and a second base positioning portion formed on the base member. And the first transmission member positioning portion and the second transmission member positioning portion formed on the first transmission member and the second transmission member, respectively, at positions corresponding to the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion. A game machine I2 characterized by the fact that.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion are formed on the base member, and the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion are supported. Since the first transmission member positioning portion and the second transmission member positioning portion are formed on the first transmission member and the second transmission member, respectively, the first transmission member positioning portion is matched with the first base positioning portion, and the first transmission member positioning portion is aligned with the first transmission member positioning portion. By assembling the first transmission member and the second transmission member to the base member while matching the second transmission member positioning portion with the second base positioning portion, the second transmission member is brought into a predetermined phase with respect to the first transmission member. Can be positioned. As a result, the workability of the positioning work can be improved.

In particular, when at least one of the first base positioning portion or the first transmission member positioning portion and at least one of the second base positioning portion or the second transmission member positioning portion is formed as a through hole, such one penetration By inserting the jig into the hole and abutting (or inserting) the tip of the inserted jig against the other, the positioning work for positioning the second transmission member in a predetermined phase with respect to the first transmission member is simplified. It can be done accurately and accurately.

In the gaming machine I2, the base member includes a first axis and a second axis that project toward the front of the base member and are inserted into the first transmission member and the second transmission member, and the first base positioning is provided. The gaming machine I3, wherein the portion and the second base positioning portion are formed as through holes.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I2, when the base member includes a first axis and a second axis protruding from the front of the base member and being inserted into the first transmission member and the second transmission member. Since the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion are formed as through holes, the first transmission member and the second transmission are positioned while positioning the second transmission member in a predetermined phase with respect to the first transmission member. When assembling the member to the base member, it is possible to perform the positioning work and the assembling work at the same time, and the workability can be improved.

That is, according to the gaming machine I3, since the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion are formed as through holes, the jig is inserted into the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion from the back surface of the base member. As a result, the jig can be projected from the front surface of the base member together with the first shaft and the second shaft. As a result, at the same time as the work of assembling (inserting) the first transmission member and the second transmission member into the first shaft and the second shaft from the front of the base member, the tip of the jig is brought into the first transmission member and the second transmission member. It is possible to perform the positioning work of contacting (or inserting) the first transmission member positioning portion and the second transmission member positioning portion. As a result, the positioning work and the assembling work can be performed at the same time, and the workability can be improved accordingly.

In the gaming machine I2 or I3, the first transmission member is composed of a pair of members coaxially overlapping in the axial direction, and the first transmission member positioning portion is formed as a through hole at a position corresponding to each other of the pair of members. A game machine I4 characterized by the fact that.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I2 or I3, the first transmission member is composed of a pair of members coaxially overlapping in the axial direction, and the first transmission member is located at a position corresponding to each other of the pair of members. Since the positioning portions are formed as through holes, the positioning work of these pair of gears can be performed at the same time, and the workability of the positioning work can be improved accordingly. Further, since the positioning work of these pair of gears can be performed by using a common jig, the product cost can be reduced accordingly. Further, since it is not necessary to connect the pair of gears to each other, the pair of gears can be pivotally supported on a common shaft so as to be relatively rotatable. The second transmission member may be configured in the same manner.

In any of the gaming machines I2 to I4, the second transmission member is composed of a pair of members coaxially overlapping in the axial direction, and the pair of members has a protruding portion protruding from one member and a protruding portion thereof. It is characterized in that it is provided with a recess recessed in the other member for receiving, and the second transmission member positioning portion is formed in a member of the pair of members arranged on the base member side. Game machine I5.

According to the gaming machine I5, in any of the gaming machines I2 to I4, the second transmission member is composed of a pair of members coaxially overlapping in the axial direction, and is a member arranged on the base member side of the pair of members. Since the second transmission member positioning portion is formed in the above, the member arranged on the base member side of the pair of members can be positioned in a predetermined phase by using the second transmission member positioning portion. .. In this case, the pair of members can position the pair of members in a predetermined phase by accepting the protruding portion of one member into the recess of the other member, and can not rotate relative to each other (that is, synchronously). It can be pivotally supported on a common shaft (rotatable). In particular, since the protrusions of the pair of members are received by the recesses and fitted to each other, the rigidity as a whole can be increased accordingly.

The recess does not have to be bottomed and may be formed as a through hole. That is, it is sufficient that the recess is formed so as to accept the connecting protrusion and be positioned in the circumferential direction (rotational direction) when the pair of members are coaxially overlapped.

A game including a liquid crystal display device, a plurality of winning openings arranged below the liquid crystal display device, and an out opening for discharging a game ball that has flowed down without being won in the plurality of winning openings from the game area. In the machine, the first winning opening of the plurality of winning openings is close to the lower edge of the gaming area or close to the position where the game ball cannot pass between the winning opening and the lower edge of the gaming area. The out port is arranged so as to be in contact with the lower edge of the game area, and the out port is a first out port arranged on one side of the game area in the width direction with respect to the first winning opening, and the first out port. The gaming machine J1 is provided with a second out opening arranged on the other side in the width direction of the gaming area with respect to the winning opening.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a liquid crystal display device, a plurality of winning openings arranged below the liquid crystal display device, and a game ball that has flowed down without being won in the plurality of winning openings are used in the gaming area. There is a gaming machine provided with an out port for discharging from (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-143268). In recent years, in order to enhance the effect of production, it is required to increase the size of the liquid crystal display device. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, in order to increase the size of the liquid crystal display device, if the position of the lower edge portion of the liquid crystal display device is lowered downward, the position of the winning opening must be lowered accordingly. At some point, if the position of the winning opening is lowered too much, it becomes impossible to secure a space for the game ball to flow down below the winning opening (between the lower edge of the game area, for example, the inner rail). That is, the game ball that has flowed down without being won in the winning opening cannot be discharged from the out opening. Therefore, there is a limit to lowering the position of the winning opening, and as a result, the liquid crystal display device cannot be sufficiently enlarged.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J1, the out openings are the first out opening arranged on one side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening among the plurality of winning openings, and the first one. Since it is provided with a second out opening arranged on the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the winning opening, the first winning opening is not won and is on one side in the width direction from the first winning opening. A game ball that has flowed down can be discharged from the game area through the first out opening, while a game ball that has flowed down to the other side in the width direction from the first winning opening without being won in the first winning opening is second. It can be discharged from the game area by the out port of. As a result, it is not necessary to secure a space for the game ball to flow down below the first winning opening (between the lower edge of the game area, for example, the inner rail). Therefore, the position of the first winning opening can be lowered further downward (that is, to a position where the game ball cannot pass between the game area and the lower edge of the game area), and the liquid crystal display device can be lowered accordingly. Can be increased in size.

The gaming machine J1 is provided with an effect member for performing an effect associated with the winning of a game ball to the second winning opening of the plurality of winning openings, and a gaming board in which the gaming area is formed on the front side transmits light. The effect member is made of a sex material, and the effect member is arranged at a position corresponding to the second winning opening on the back side of the game board, and the second winning port and the effect member are placed on the first winning port. On the other hand, the gaming machine J2 is arranged on one side in the width direction or the other side in the width direction of the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1, the directing member is provided with a directing member for producing a performance accompanying the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening of the plurality of winning openings. Since it is arranged at a position corresponding to the second winning opening on the back side of the game board made of a light-transmitting material, the scene is seen by the player who visually recognizes the scene where the game ball is won in the second winning opening. At the same time, the effect of the effect member can be visually recognized behind the player, and the effect associated with the winning of the game ball to the second winning opening can be effectively performed.

In this case, since the second winning opening and the effect member are arranged on one side in the width direction or the other side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first winning opening, the positions of the second winning port and the effect member Can be lowered downward, and the position of the lower edge portion of the liquid crystal display device can be lowered accordingly. As a result, the size of the liquid crystal display device can be increased even when the effect member is arranged.

That is, disposing the effect member on the back side of the game board at the position corresponding to the second winning opening hinders the increase in size of the liquid crystal display device because the effect member interferes with the liquid crystal display device. Become. On the other hand, as described above, the first out opening and the second out opening are arranged on one side in the width direction and the other side in the width direction of the gaming area with respect to the first winning opening. Not only can the position of the winning opening of 1 be lowered downward, but also the degree of freedom of the arrangement position on one side in the width direction or the other side in the width direction of the game area of the first winning opening can be secured. It is possible to secure a space for arranging the second winning opening and the effect member, and as a result, according to the gaming machine J2, the layout is such that the effect member is arranged on the back side of the game board at the position corresponding to the second winning opening. Is now possible.

In the game machine J2, the game machine J3 is characterized in that the second winning opening is arranged substantially at the center in the width direction of the game area.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J2, the second winning opening is arranged substantially in the center in the width direction of the gaming area, so that the size of the liquid crystal display device can be increased and the gaming area can be limited. It is possible to effectively utilize the reserved space and secure a wider space for arranging the effect members. That is, with such a layout, it is possible to efficiently increase the size of both the liquid crystal display device and the effect member. Further, by disposing the second winning opening at substantially the center in the width direction of the game area, it is possible to lengthen the flow path of the game ball to the second winning opening. As a result, the playability for winning the game ball to the second winning opening can be enhanced, and the expectation for the production by the directing member accompanying the winning of the second winning opening can be increased.

The gaming machine J2 or J3 includes a second effect member arranged on the back side of the game board, and the second effect member is arranged at a position where at least a part of the second effect member overlaps the effect member in front view. A gaming machine J4 characterized by being installed.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J2 or J3, a second directing member arranged on the back side of the gaming board is provided, and the second directing member is at least one in the front view. Since the portion is arranged at a position where it overlaps with the effect member, when the game board is formed of a light-transmitting material, only the necessary part of the second effect member is made visible to the player, and the other part is produced. It can be shielded from the player by the member. As a result, it is not necessary to design the second effect member on the assumption that the entire member is visually recognized by the player, so that the degree of freedom in designing the second effect member can be improved.

A gaming machine J5, wherein in any of the gaming machines J2 to J4, the effect member is formed in a circular shape that can be rotated around the second winning opening.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines J2 to J4, the effect member is formed in a circular shape that can be rotated around the second winning opening, and thus surrounds the second winning opening. It is possible to perform the production in the entire area, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the production accompanying the winning of the second winning opening.

In this case, the second winning opening must be arranged at a position where a space for allowing the game ball to flow down can be secured both above and below the winning opening, and the second winning opening is located in the game area with respect to the second winning opening. Since the first winning opening is arranged on one side in the width direction or the other side in the width direction and below the game area, the effect member is formed in a circle centered on the second winning opening. Therefore, the space that can be secured around the second winning opening can be used as effectively as possible, and as a result, the area of the effect member can be increased and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B5, C1 to C5, D1 to D5, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H5, I1 to I5, J1 to J5, the gaming machine is A game machine K1 characterized by being a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B5, C1 to C5, D1 to D5, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H5, I1 to I5, J1 to J5, the gaming machine is A gaming machine K2 characterized by being a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, B1 to B5, C1 to C5, D1 to D5, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H5, I1 to I5, J1 to J5, the gaming machine is The gaming machine K3 is characterized by being a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a moving member formed movably, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a transmission for transmitting the driving force generated by the driving means to the moving member. There is a gaming machine provided with means, and the transmission means includes a first transmission member and a second transmission member that is meshed with the first transmission member in a predetermined phase (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2009-125022).
According to this gaming machine, when one of the first transmission member or the second transmission member is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, the rotation of one of them rotates the other of the first transmission member or the second transmission member. The moving member is moved by the rotation of the other side.
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the second transmission member is not meshed with the first transmission member in a predetermined phase, the moving range of the moving member is deviated. Therefore, when assembling (toothing) the first transmission member and the second transmission member, it is necessary to position the toothing position of the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member in a predetermined phase before assembling. There is a problem that the positioning work is complicated.
The present technical idea was made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and when it is necessary to position the teeth of the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member in a predetermined phase before assembling. , An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the workability of positioning work.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is a moving member formed so as to be movable, a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving member, and a driving force generated by the driving means. A transmission means for transmitting a force to the moving member, and the transmission means includes a first transmission member and a second transmission member that is meshed with the first transmission member in a predetermined phase. A positioning means for positioning the toothing position of the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member in the predetermined phase is provided.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 includes a base member in which the first transmission member and the second transmission member are rotatably supported in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, and the positioning means is attached to the base member. The first transmission formed in the first transmission member and the second transmission member at positions corresponding to the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion formed and the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion, respectively. It is composed of a member positioning unit and a second transmission member positioning unit.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, wherein the base member is projected toward the front surface of the base member and inserted into the first transmission member and the second transmission member. A shaft and a second shaft are provided, and the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion are formed as through holes.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, since a positioning means for positioning the toothing position of the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member in a predetermined phase is provided, the first transmission member and the second transmission member are assembled ( At the time of (toothing), the first transmission member and the second transmission member can be assembled by using such a positioning means. That is, when the toothing position of the second transmission member with respect to the first transmission member is positioned at a predetermined phase, the workability of the positioning work can be improved.
As described above, the teeth of the first transmission member and the teeth of the second transmission member do not have to be formed over the entire circumference, and it is sufficient that the teeth are formed in a part in the circumferential direction.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, a first base positioning portion and a second base positioning portion are formed in the base member, and the first bases thereof are formed. Since the first transmission member positioning portion and the second transmission member positioning portion are formed on the first transmission member and the second transmission member at positions corresponding to the positioning portion and the second base positioning portion, the first base positioning portion has a first position. By assembling the first transmission member and the second transmission member to the base member while matching the 1 transmission member positioning portion and the second transmission member positioning portion with the second base positioning portion, the first transmission member The second transmission member can be positioned in a predetermined phase. As a result, the workability of the positioning work can be improved.
In particular, when at least one of the first base positioning portion or the first transmission member positioning portion and at least one of the second base positioning portion or the second transmission member positioning portion is formed as a through hole, such one penetration By inserting the jig into the hole and abutting (or inserting) the tip of the inserted jig against the other, the positioning work for positioning the second transmission member in a predetermined phase with respect to the first transmission member is simplified. It can be done accurately and accurately.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, the first axis protruding from the front of the base member and inserted into the first transmission member and the second transmission member and When the base member includes the second axis, the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion are formed as through holes, so that the second transmission member is positioned in a predetermined phase with respect to the first transmission member. When the first transmission member and the second transmission member are assembled to the base member, the positioning work and the assembling work can be performed at the same time, and the workability thereof can be improved.
That is, according to the technical idea 3, since the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion are formed as through holes, the jig is inserted into the first base positioning portion and the second base positioning portion from the back surface of the base member. By allowing the jig, the jig can be projected from the front surface of the base member together with the first shaft and the second shaft. As a result, at the same time as the work of assembling (inserting) the first transmission member and the second transmission member into the first shaft and the second shaft from the front of the base member, the tip of the jig is brought into the first transmission member and the second transmission member. It is possible to perform the positioning work of contacting (or inserting) the first transmission member positioning portion and the second transmission member positioning portion. As a result, the positioning work and the assembling work can be performed at the same time, and the workability can be improved accordingly.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
13 Game board 64 1st winning opening (2nd winning opening)
71 1st out port (out port)
72 Second out port (out port)
81 Third symbol display device (liquid crystal display device)
300 rotary operation unit (directing member)
410 Mounting base (part of base member)
410a positioning hole (first base positioning part)
410b Positioning hole (second base positioning part)
421 Back case body (part of base member)
421a Positioning hole (1st base positioning part)
421b Positioning hole (second base positioning part)
426 1st axis 427 2nd axis 430 Drive motor (drive means)
451 Opening and closing first gear (part of transmission means, first transmission member, second transmission member)
451d connecting protrusion (positioning means, protrusion)
451e Positioning hole (positioning means, first transmission member positioning unit)
452 Opening and closing second gear (part of transmission means, first transmission member, second transmission member)
452d connecting protrusion (pin part)
452e Positioning hole (positioning means, second transmission member positioning unit)
461 Rotating first gear (part of transmission means, drive means side member, first transmission member, second transmission member)
461a1 Cylindrical surface (part of non-formed part)
461d Connecting hole (positioning means, recess)
462 Rotating second gear (part of transmission means, moving member side member, first transmission member, second transmission member)
462a1 Non-formed surface (part of non-formed part)
462d Connecting protrusion (fastened part)
462e Positioning hole (positioning means, second transmission member positioning unit)
471 Back arm body (part of first moving member or second moving member)
472 Front arm body (first moving member or part of second moving member)
481c connecting groove (connecting groove)
491,492 Moving members (moving member, first moving member, second moving member)
510 Substrate member (base member)
511 Guide groove (slide hole)
522 drive motor (drive means)
524 Crank gear (part of transmission means)
525 connecting rod (part of transmission means)
526 Connecting shaft (part of transmission means, connecting member)
530 Slide mechanism (moving member)
531c Insertion shaft (protruding part)
539 1st connecting member (part of moving member, 3rd moving member)
539e Lower surface (third contact part, third contact surface)
541 First link member (part of transmission means, link member)
600 Second coupling operation unit (second effect member)
621 Inner link member (part of transmission means)
622 Outer link member (part of transmission means)
630 Second coupling member (part of moving member, first moving member and second moving member)
630a Top surface (first contact portion, second contact portion, first contact surface, second contact surface)
630b Opposing surface (contact surface)
640 drive motor (drive means)
650a 2nd specified winning opening (1st winning opening)
700 ring operation unit (second production member)
710 Intermediate case body (part of base member)
711a Front (opposite wall)
713a Front (opposite wall)
720 Rear case body (part of base member)
730 Front case body (part of base member)
731a Back (opposite wall)
732 Pillar part (intermediate part)
733 Guide rod (extended member, part of guide member)
740 drive motor (drive means)
761 Pinion gear (part of transmission means, pinion)
762 rack (part of transmission means)
770 Link member (part of transmission means, connecting member)
771 Main body 773 Protruding wall (part of connecting member, tooth forming part)
774 Gear part (second transmission member)
774b Tooth 780 Lifting base body (moving member, part of the second moving member)
784 Guided part (guide part, part of guide member)
790 Ring forming member (moving member)
792 Gear part (1st transmission member)
811 axis (1st axis)
820 Arm member (moving member)
822a 1st groove (guide groove)
822b 2nd groove (recess)
830 drive motor (drive means)
831 Drive shaft (second shaft)
832 Drive arm (rotating member)
833 Protruding pin (pin member)

Claims (2)

A plurality of entrances, a guide unit configured to be able to guide a game ball toward at least one of the plurality of entrances, and a predetermined entrance among the plurality of entrances. In a gaming machine equipped with an out port for discharging a gaming ball that has flowed down from the gaming area.
The first entrance of the plurality of entrances is close to the lower edge of the game area or close to the lower edge of the game area to a position where the game ball cannot pass through the lower edge of the game area. Arranged in contact with the lower edge of the area,
The out openings are arranged on the right side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first entry port, and on the left side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first entry port. With a second out port to be disposed,
The guide portion has a plate-shaped flow bottom surface, is arranged at a position upstream of the first entry port, and guides the flowing game ball toward the first entry port side. Possible,
The first out port is arranged on the downstream side of the guide portion, and the first out port is arranged on the downstream side of the guide portion.
The guide unit has a length that allows a plurality of game balls to be guided at the same time.
The first entry port is arranged in a region on the left side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the center in the width direction of the game area, and the guide portion enables a game ball flowing down on the right side in the width direction to enter. is composed,
The gaming machine
Branching means and
The introduction means for forming the introduction route to the first entrance is provided.
In the branching means, a game ball that flows down the left side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the branching means can flow down toward the guide portion, and a game that flows down the right side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the branching means. The ball is configured to be able to flow down toward the second entrance of the plurality of entrances.
The entrance to the introduction path, the gaming machine characterized by Rukoto is configured to be opened toward the guide portion side of the width direction side of the game area. A liquid crystal display device, a game area in which a game ball can flow down at least on the right side of the liquid crystal display device, a plurality of ball entrances arranged in the game area, and at least one of the plurality of ball entrances. A guide unit that can guide the game ball toward the ball, and an out port that discharges the game ball that has flowed down without entering a predetermined entry port among the plurality of entry ports from the game area. In the equipped game machine
The first entrance of the plurality of entrances is close to the lower edge of the game area or close to the lower edge of the game area to a position where the game ball cannot pass through the lower edge of the game area. Arranged in contact with the lower edge of the area,
The out openings are arranged on the right side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first entry port, and on the left side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the first entry port. With a second out port to be disposed,
The guide portion has a plate-shaped flow bottom surface, is arranged at a position upstream of the first entry port, and guides the flowing game ball toward the first entry port side. Possible,
The first out port is arranged on the downstream side of the guide portion, and the first out port is arranged on the downstream side of the guide portion.
The guide unit has a length that allows a plurality of game balls to be guided at the same time.
The first ball entry port is arranged in a region on the left side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the center in the width direction of the game area, and the game flows down the right side in the width direction with respect to the liquid crystal display device by the guide unit. The ball is configured to be able to enter ,
The gaming machine
Branching means and
The introduction means for forming the introduction route to the first entrance is provided.
In the branching means, a game ball that flows down the left side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the branching means can flow down toward the guide portion, and a game that flows down the right side in the width direction of the game area with respect to the branching means. The ball is configured to be able to flow down toward the second entrance of the plurality of entrances.
The entrance to the introduction path, the gaming machine characterized by Rukoto is configured to be opened toward the guide portion side of the width direction side of the game area.

Images